JP7097122B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic informing means is provided. The gaming machine includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, a door that can be opened and closed, and notification means including sound output means. When the power is turned on in a state in which the above operation has been performed, the setting value can be changed. Further, when the set value is changeable and the door body is in the open state, the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable. , when the set value is changeable and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state, an alarm sound indicating that the set value is changeable is started to be output. [Selection drawing] Fig. 28

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, as one of the game consoles such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game console provided with various notification means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-296354

However, there is room for improvement in the notification means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means.

The game console according to the present invention is a game console provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, a door body that can be opened and closed, and a notification means, and is provided by a setting key. When the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed, the set value can be changed, the notification means is a means including a sound output means, and the sound output means is the setting. When the value can be changed and the door body is open (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the output of the notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed is executed. The sound output means is in a state where the set value can be changed and the set value can be changed when the door body changes from the open state to the closed state. It is a means for starting the output of the notification sound shown, and the sound output means is a means for outputting the notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as the first sound in the first case. In the sound output means, the door body is in the open state when the state in which the set value can be changed ends and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after shifting to the normal gaming state. This is a means for outputting a notification sound indicating the above as a second sound, and the game console is characterized in that the first sound and the second sound are different sounds .

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the notification means.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a planwise manner, and (b) is the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout and the operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main process, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows. (A) It is a schematic diagram (front view) which showed the main part of the slot machine 100. (B) is a figure which showed the display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change / setting confirmation mode, and the display example of the LED board 101a arranged inside the main body 101. (C) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the operation check MC was tentatively selected in the menu screen. (D) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of operation check MC temporarily selected. (A) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the LED check LC item temporarily selected in the operation check menu screen MCM. (B) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of the upper area AE temporarily selected in the LED check area menu screen LED. (C) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of the central part area CE temporarily selected in the LED check area menu screen LED. (D) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of the lower area UE temporarily selected in the ED check area menu screen LEM. (A) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the speaker check item SC temporarily selected in the operation check menu screen MCM. (B), (c) In the setting change / setting confirmation mode, the flow until the LED check in the upper region is selected with the door open is shown in chronological order. (A)-(c) In the setting change / setting confirmation mode, the flow until the LED check in the upper region is selected with the door open is shown in chronological order. (C) In the LED check area menu screen LED, the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the upper area AE temporarily selected. (D) It is a figure which showed the flow from the time when the LED check of an upper region is selected in the state of a door closed until the door is closed, and the LED check of an upper region is executed. (A), (b) It is a figure which showed the flow from the time when the LED check of the upper region is selected in the state of a door closed, until the door is closed, and the LED check of an upper region is executed. .. (C), (d) In the state where the door is closed, the LED check in the central region is selected during the LED check in the upper region, and the flow until the LED check in the central region is executed is shown in chronological order. Is. (A), (b) In the state where the door is closed, the LED check in the central region is selected during the LED check in the upper region, and the flow until the LED check in the central region is executed is shown in chronological order. Is. (C) It is a figure which showed the state which the door was opened while performing the LED check of the central part area with the door closed. (D) It is a figure which showed the state which the door was closed while performing the LED check of the central part area with the door open state. It is a figure which showed the flow until the LED check of a lower region is selected and the LED check of a lower region is executed during the execution of the LED check (door closure) of the central region (a) to (c). (D) It is a figure which showed the state which the door was opened when the LED check of the lower area was performed with the door closed. (A) It is a figure which showed the state which the item of the speaker check SC was tentatively selected in the operation check menu screen MCM. (B)-(d) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC temporarily selected in the operation check menu screen MCM. (A) It is a figure which showed the state which the door was closed while the speaker check was performed with the door open. (B)-(d) During the execution of the LED check (door opening) in the central region, the lever operation for confirming the setting is executed, and the flow until the front door 102 is closed before returning the setting key is shown. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the flow until the front door 102 is closed after returning a setting key during execution of LED check (door opening) of (a) to (c) a central region. It is the schematic (front view) which showed the main part of the slot machine 100 in the two-card betting recommended game. It is the schematic (front view) which showed the main part of the slot machine 100 in the two-card betting recommended game. (A) It is a schematic diagram (front view) which showed the main part of the slot machine 100 in a two-card betting game. (B) to (d) are schematic views (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in the three-card betting recommended game. It is the schematic (front view) which showed the main part of the slot machine 100 in the three-card betting recommended game. (A) It is a figure which showed the state which the power was turned on in the state which opened the front door 102 and turned on the setting key provided inside the main body 101. b) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the system volume setting SS was tentatively selected on the menu screen. (C) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of a system volume setting SS temporarily selected. (A), (b) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the power saving mode setting EM was tentatively selected in the menu screen which returned from the system volume setting. (C) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM temporarily selected. (D) Power saving mode setting screen It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which the power saving mode setting on is tentatively selected in the EMM. (A) It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which the power saving mode setting on is set. (B), (c) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the system volume setting SS was tentatively selected in the menu screen which returned from the power saving mode setting. (D) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of a system volume setting SS temporarily selected. (A) It is a figure which showed the display example after the administrator setting volume was changed to the volume 1 in the system volume screen SSM, and the OK button 193a was pressed. (B), (c) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the power saving mode setting EM was tentatively selected in the menu screen which returned from the system volume setting. (D) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM temporarily selected. (A) Power saving mode setting screen It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which the power saving mode setting off is tentatively selected in the EMM. (B) It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which the power saving mode setting off was set. (C), (d) It is a figure which showed the display example when the item of the system volume setting SS was tentatively selected in the menu screen which returned from the power saving mode setting. (A) It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of a system volume setting SS temporarily selected. (A) It is a schematic diagram (front view) of a main part which extracted and showed the notification means provided in the slot machine 100. (B)-(f) It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the execution of the operation check and the setting change to the transition to a normal game in a setting change mode. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the operation check and the setting change to the transition to a normal game in a setting change mode. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the execution of the operation check and the setting change in the setting change mode (a) to (c) until the transition to a normal game. (D)-(f) It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the execution of the operation check and the setting confirmation in the setting confirmation mode to the transition to a normal game. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the execution of the operation check and the setting confirmation in the setting confirmation mode to the transition to a normal game. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series from the execution of the operation check and the setting confirmation in the setting confirmation mode to the transition to a normal game. It is a figure which showed an example of various notifications in time series until the transition to a normal game state (demo screen) after the setting change is completed in the setting change mode. (A) It is a front view which showed the state which the movable body KT moved to the upper limit position (second position). (B) It is a front view which showed the state which the movable body KT moved to the lower limit position (the first position). (C)-(f) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (first case) is shown in chronological order. It is a figure. (G)-(h) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd operation of the movable body KT in time series. (A)-(d) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd operation of the movable body KT in time series. (E)-(h) The power is turned on when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection (second state) and the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when it is done. (A)-(c) The power is turned on when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection (second state) and the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when it is done. (D)-(g) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (second case) is shown in chronological order. It is a figure. (A)-(f) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (second case) is shown in chronological order. It is a figure. (A)-(f) When the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state (second state), the movable body KT is other than the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when the power is turned on in the state of being located at the position (third position). (A)-(e) The power is turned on when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection (second state) and the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when it is done. (A)-(g) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in a normal game in time series. (A)-(h) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in time series when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (B)-(f) It is a figure which showed the modification of the operation of the movable body KT in time series. It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door 102 is opened. (A) It is a schematic diagram (front view) of a main part which extracted and showed the notification means provided in the slot machine 100. (B) It is a figure which showed the display example by the main board display 190. (C)-(e) It is a figure which showed an example of the error notification when the door opening error occurred. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the error notification when a door opening error occurred. (B)-(f) It is a figure which showed an example of the error notification when the hopper error occurred. (A)-(f) It is a figure which showed an example of the error notification when the hopper error occurred. It is the figure which showed the example of the solution by the door reset of (a)-(f) hopper error in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the example of the error notification of the hopper error in the case of shifting to the setting change mode (a) to (f) in time series. It is a figure which showed the example of the error notification of the hopper error in the case of shifting to the setting change mode (a) to (e) in time series. It is a figure which showed the example of the error notification of the hopper error in the case of shifting to the setting confirmation mode (a) to (f) in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the example of the error notification of the hopper error at the time of shifting to the setting confirmation mode in time series. (A)-(f) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting change operation in a normal setting change mode in time series. (A)-(b) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting change operation in a normal setting change mode in time series. (C)-(e) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode in time series. (A)-(b) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the setting change mode by operation of the setting key after power-on (c) to (e) in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the setting change mode by operation of the setting key after power-on (a)-(f) in time series.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. In the specification of the present application, the state in which the front door 102 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body 101 may be referred to as "door open" or "open state", and the front door 102 is closed with respect to the main body 101. The closed (closed) state may be referred to as "door closed" or "closed state".

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened in the closed state by inserting the key held by the manager of the game store into the door key hole 140. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change from the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. ..

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter, also referred to as “open / close sensor”; not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this opening / closing sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 passes between the spaces.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including the open / close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open / close sensor indicates the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high-level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open / close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state is in the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to the one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state are always switched according to the opening and closing of the door body, and even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the closed detection state. On the contrary, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be the one that can be changed to the open detection state.

Here, the open / close sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state becomes the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a certain operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

The "certain operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, a DIP switch for setting the open / close sensor to the closed detection state may be provided, and the DIP switch may be operated as a predetermined operation. .. Further, when the detection means is configured by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open / close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnets close to each other.

Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a reel backlight 148 (see FIG. 28 and the like) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If three bets are placed, the five lines to which the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line are added may be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for staging.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a “three-card betting game”, and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a “two-card betting game”.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called "forward push operation order". The operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push" is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a decorative title panel 162 for displaying the model name and the like is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.

A staging device 160 is disposed on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the staging device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for executing an effect described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when performing a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the granting of benefits may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 192.

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game medal insertion lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127) is provided, respectively.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the staging image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 3A. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane-developed manner.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 frame on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 frame on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 frame on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" symbols are arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 (b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are the bonus roles for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay is the replay without inserting a new medal. As a role that enables a game, it may be called a "working role" to be distinguished from a winning role, but the "winning role" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replaying role that are operating roles. Is included. In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, big bonus, regular. Includes bonuses and winning replays.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small roles (cherries, watermelons, bells), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The "big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7) -BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" and BB2 "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7) -BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol". In addition, the flags of BB1 and BB2 are carried over. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the prize is won. The flag indicating the internal winning is maintained until the game is completed, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 are displayed. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state of winning all together.

The "regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) -RB symbol-RB symbol". As for RB, the flag is carried over in the same manner as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the big bonus game is started without the start condition that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won and the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game is completed, the regular bonus game may be automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is started immediately.

"Small role (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" cherry "," watermelon "," bell ") is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol. The combination is "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol" for cherry, "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" for watermelon, and "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" for bell. The corresponding payouts are as shown in the figure, with 4 cherries, 12 watermelons, and 8 bells. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol of the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" for the replay game.

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each combination is the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each combination, and the numerical data in the range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery described later (65536 in this embodiment). It is calculated by dividing by. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one role, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. ..

In the present embodiment, the watermelon and the cherry each win a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. In addition, the bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally elected in the internal lottery process and the stopping operation is performed in the correct stopping operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a push order role.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (stop operation content) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation for notifying the stop operation content to assist the winning. Specifically, when the push order combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is notified, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation content of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the operation navigation is not executed even if the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won.

In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning or losing of the winning may be determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the game shifts to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state or when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game shifts to the AT state and a predetermined number of AT games is given. In the AT state, an AT additional lottery is performed in which the number of AT games is added, and when the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games are added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the normal state is entered.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 4, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

When the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and when there is an insertion operation. Turns on the winning line indicator lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals.

Further, a check as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated is performed based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined and the first sub-control unit 400 determines. On the other hand, preparations are made to send a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for the winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internally winning combination is activated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon has been internally won is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is lost (the winning combination). In the case of non-winning), an internal winning command indicating a loss is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. The operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination whose stop operation order is questioned, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is input in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the winning determination process is performed. In the winning judgment process, the winning judgment of the symbol stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, and when the symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning is won. It is judged that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon has won a prize. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of a BB prize, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S207, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, the staging control process (details will be described later) is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, the setting to output this control command is set, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S502, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, the staging control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 7A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S802, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S903. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the staging scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S906, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Operation check>
Next, an operation check that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

Here, the operation check means that a certain effect means (one or a plurality of effect means) among the plurality of effect means provided in the slot machine 100 is operated based on a predetermined operation pattern. It is a work of checking (inspecting) whether or not a certain staging means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether or not there is an abnormality).

<Operation check / staging means (display means)>
First, prior to the explanation of the operation check, the staging means included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic view (front view) showing a main part of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means capable of displaying as one of the effect means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, a payout number display device 127, a stored number display device 125, a game information display device 126, and the like described with reference to FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and an LED.

When the display means is adopted as the effect means, as a certain operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern in which the entire display area of the display means is filled with one or a plurality of colors, and the display and non-display of the display means are displayed and hidden at a certain time interval. Operation pattern that repeats with, operation pattern that lights the LED segments in a certain order, operation pattern that blinks the LED, operation pattern that changes the color of the display means, operation pattern that displays in a certain order when there are multiple display means , An operation pattern in which only some of the display means are displayed when there are a plurality of display means.

<Operation check / staging means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the effect means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 2.

When the sound output means is adopted as the effect means, as certain operation patterns, for example, an operation pattern for outputting a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern for changing the volume and frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, and the like. An operation pattern that stops (silences) the output of sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern that outputs sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, and some sound output when there are multiple sound output means. An operation pattern for outputting sound only by means can be mentioned.

In the specification of the present application, the sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277 may be collectively referred to as "speaker", and the operation check of these sound output means may be referred to as "speaker check".

<Operation check / staging means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the directing means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include an upper lamp 142 described with reference to FIG. 1, a side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c for performing the above-mentioned operation navigation, and reel backlights of reels 110 to 112. Examples include 148, a title panel 162, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, a start lever 135, and the like. In this example, all of the light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When the light emitting means is adopted as the effect means, as certain operation patterns, for example, an operation pattern for lighting the LEDs constituting the light emitting means in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LEDs constituting the light emitting means, and a light emitting means. Examples thereof include an operation pattern for changing a color, an operation pattern for emitting light in a certain order when there are a plurality of light emitting means, an operation pattern for displaying only a part of the light emitting means when there are a plurality of light emitting means, and the like.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of the light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include a frame lamp, an effect button, and an accessory.

<Operation check / staging means (light emitting means) / upper lamp, side lamp>
The upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 operate based on a certain operation pattern when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is performed). (In this example, light emission based on an operation pattern in which blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ... is repeated) can be executed.

On the other hand, when the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 do not satisfy the operation check start condition (in this example, when the front door 102 is open), the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 light up in white and do not satisfy the operation check start condition. In this case (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is not performed), the light is turned off.

<Operation check / staging means (light emitting means) / navigation lamp>
The navigation lamps 149a to 149c operate based on a certain operation pattern when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and the operation check is applied). In the example, it is possible to execute light emission based on an operation pattern in which white lighting and extinguishing are repeated.

On the other hand, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c are lit in white when the operation check start condition is not satisfied (in this example, the front door 102 is open), and the operation check start condition is not satisfied (in this example). In this example, the light is turned off when the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to the operation check).

<Operation check / staging means (light emitting means) / reel backlight, title panel>
When the reel backlight 148 and the title panel 162 satisfy the operation check start condition (in this example, the operation check target), the reel backlight 148 and the title panel 162 operate based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, white lighting). While it is possible to execute light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats turning off and off, if the operation check start condition is not met (in this example, it is not the target of the operation check), the light is turned off and the front door is turned off. Opening or closing 102 is not an operation check condition.

<Operation check / staging means (light emitting means) / staging button, stop button>
The effect button 192 and the stop buttons 137 to 139 operate based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, red) when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation check target). While it is possible to execute lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → ... (If not), the light is turned off, and opening or closing the front door 102 is not a condition for starting the operation check.

In the specification of the present application, a light emitting means composed of LEDs such as an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a reel backlight 148, a navigation lamp 149a to 149c, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, and a title panel 162 is used. , The term "LED" may be used generically, and the operation check of these light emitting means may be referred to as "LED check", but the "light emitting means" according to the present invention is not limited to the LED.

Further, since the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are light emitting means arranged in the upper region of the slot machine 100, these light emitting means or one or a plurality of LEDs constituting the light emitting means are collectively referred to as one or a plurality of LEDs. It may be referred to as "LED in the upper area" or simply "upper area".

Further, since the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the effect buttons 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are light emitting means arranged in the central region of the slot machine 100, these light emitting means or the said light emitting means. The one or more LEDs constituting the light emitting means may be collectively referred to as "LED in the central region" or simply "central region".

Further, since the title panel 162 is a light emitting means arranged in the lower region of the slot machine 100, the light emitting means or one or a plurality of LEDs constituting the light emitting means are collectively referred to as "lower region. It may be referred to as "LED" or simply "lower area".

<Operation check / setting change / setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to the explanation of the operation check, the setting change / setting confirmation mode will be described.

When the power of the game console according to the present embodiment is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on (or a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on). It is possible to shift to the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed before (when the setting key is turned on before the control unit confirms the on / off state of the setting key).

Here, the setting change means to change the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the operation means (in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of the setting 1 to the setting 6) on the payout number display 127. Every time the pressing operation by the setting switch) is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly executed to return to 1. It is possible to change the set value with.

Further, in the setting change mode, when the pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change is completed, and the front door 102 is opened with the setting key off. When it is closed, it shifts to the normal game state where normal games are possible.

When the operation of the operation means (start lever 135) is executed without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or by repeating the pressing operation of the operation means (setting switch), the set value is set once (for example). , Setting 5 → Setting 6 → Setting 1 → ... → Setting 5) When the operation of the operating means (start lever 135) is executed, the setting is the same as the previous setting.

The game console according to this embodiment can shift to a setting confirmation mode in which setting confirmation is possible when the front door 102 is opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 is turned on after the power is turned on. Is.

Here, the setting confirmation means to confirm the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the setting value (for example, setting 1) initially set by the pressing operation by the operation means (setting switch) or the setting value is confirmed. It is possible to confirm the set value by displaying the set value (any of the settings 1 to 6) set by the setting change on the payout number display 127.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which the setting can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change / setting confirmation mode. , The setting change mode that can only change the setting, the setting confirmation mode that can only confirm the setting, and the mode that can change the setting and confirm the setting are included.

<Operation check / Power on → Menu selection>
FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change / setting confirmation mode and a display example of the LED substrate 101a arranged inside the main body 101.

When the setting change operation is performed during the setting change / setting confirmation mode, the set value (one of the settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and FIG. 8 (b) is shown. As shown below, a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the set value is being changed (undecided) is displayed on the LED substrate 101a. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed during the setting change / setting confirmation mode, the numerical value indicating the current setting value on the payout number display 127 and the LED board 101a (3 indicating the setting 3 in this example). ) Is displayed.

Further, in the setting change / setting confirmation mode of this example, the menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a (operation means), the clerk of the amusement shop can set the setting change history, error history, system volume setting, power saving mode setting, and operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). It is possible to arbitrarily select any of the items. Needless to say, the items that can be selected in the setting change / setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example.

For example, on the menu screen (setting screen), when the setting change history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmation, and when the error history item is selected, the relevant setting is displayed. It is possible to display the history of errors that have occurred in the game table in the past, and the history of opening and closing the front door 102, turning on the power, and restoring power.

In addition, when an item for setting the system volume is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), a maximum volume that can be set only by an administrator such as a game store clerk or an error (for example, opening the front door 102) occurs. It is possible to set the volume of the error sound (door opening notification sound) that is sometimes output, and when the power saving mode setting item is selected, the power saving mode setting (for example, the volume setting of the speakers 272 and 277 and the LED) (Simple setting of brightness, etc.) is possible. The details of the system volume setting and the power saving mode setting will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27.

Further, when the operation check item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), the operation check of the LED and the speaker 272, 277 included in the slot machine 100 can be performed. Hereinafter, this operation check will be described in detail.

According to this example, since the operation check can be performed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, only the clerk of the game store can confirm the operation and the setting is changed unintentionally. It may be possible to prevent the situation.

<Selection of operation check / operation check>
FIG. 8 (c) is a diagram showing a display example when the item of the operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen, and FIG. 8 (d) is a diagram showing an OK button with the item of the operation check MC temporarily selected. It is a figure which showed the display example after 193a was pressed.

When the item of the operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the operation check menu screen MCM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 8D. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, a clerk of a game store or the like can arbitrarily select either the LED check LC or the speaker check SC on the operation check menu screen MCM.

According to this example, during the operation check of the first staging means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of the second staging means, and the operation of the second staging means (speaker). During the check, it is impossible to check the operation of the first certain staging means, so that the operation check of each staging means can be performed more reliably.

<Operation check / LED check>
9 (a) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item temporarily selected in the operation check menu screen MCM described with reference to FIG. 8 (d). Is.

When the LED check LC item is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, the LED check area menu screen LEM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 9A. .. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, a clerk of a game store or the like can operate the LED operation check target area (in this example, the upper area AE, the middle area CE, and the lower area) on the LED check area menu screen LEM. It is possible to arbitrarily select any item of UE).

LED check area The upper area in the menu screen LED indicates the operation check of the LEDs (in this example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area of the slot machine 100, and these LEDs (upper part). When it is desired to check the operation of the lamp 142 and the side lamp 144), as shown in FIG. 9B, after temporarily selecting the item of the upper region UE, the OK button 193a is pressed.

FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the upper region AE temporarily selected in the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9A. ..

In this example, since the item of the upper region AE is selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper region are subject to the operation check, and the LED of the upper region in the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed. A display notifying that the check is in progress (in this example, a display of the character string "upper / side lamp is being confirmed") is displayed, and the LED check in the upper area is started.

LED check area The central area in the menu screen LED is an LED arranged in the central area of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the effect button 192, and the stop button 137. ~ 139) is shown, and when it is desired to check the operation of these LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect button 192, and stop button 137 to 139), the central region is shown. After temporarily selecting the CE item, the OK button 193a is pressed.

FIG. 9 (c) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the central region CE temporarily selected in the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9 (a). be.

In this example, since the item of the central region CE is selected, the LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect buttons 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) arranged in the central region operate. It is the target of the check, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays that the LED in the central region is being checked (in this example, the character string "checking the lamp button under the backlight / reel" is displayed). At the same time, the LED check in the central region is started.

LED check area The lower area in the menu screen LED indicates the operation check of the LEDs (title panel 162 in this example) arranged in the lower area of the slot machine 100, and these LEDs (title panel 162). If you want to check the operation, temporarily select the item of the lower area UE, and then press the OK button 193a.

FIG. 9D is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the lower region UE temporarily selected in the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9A. ..

In this example, since the item of the lower region UE is selected, the LED (title panel 162) arranged in the lower region is the target of the operation check, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is checking the LED in the lower region. A display notifying that is displayed (in this example, the character string "Title panel is being confirmed" is displayed), and the LED check in the lower area is started.

According to this example, in the operation check, since a certain effect means arranged in an area where the operation check is not executed does not execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern, the effect means that is the target of the operation check. Is easier to understand, and the operation check can be performed more reliably.

<Operation check / Speaker check>
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC temporarily selected in the operation check menu screen MCM shown in FIG. 8D.

When the speaker check SC item is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, as shown in FIG. 10A, the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that the speaker check is in progress. (In this example, the character string "Speaker is being confirmed" is displayed) and the speaker check is started. The details of the speaker check will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like.

<Operation check / LED check in the upper area (door open)>
10 (b) and 10 (c) and 11 (a) to 11 (c) show the flow until the LED check in the upper region is selected in the setting change / setting confirmation mode with the door open. It is a figure shown by.

The state shown in FIG. 10B is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening is started. In this example, the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) is started as the door opening notification. And a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) is lit in white.

The state shown in FIG. 10 (c) following is a state in which the item of the operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen, and the state shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a state in which the item of the operation check MC is temporarily selected. The state after the button 193a is pressed, and the state shown in FIG. 11B is the state after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item temporarily selected.

In this example, since the door is open in any of the states, the door opening notification is continued, and the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) and a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamp 149a to 149c) is lit in white.

The state shown in FIG. 11C is a state in which the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the upper area AE temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LED shown in FIG. 11B.

In this example, since the item of the upper region AE is selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper region are subject to the operation check, and the LED of the upper region in the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed. A display is displayed to notify that the check is in progress (in this example, the character string "upper / side lamp is being checked" is displayed), but since the door open notification is prioritized over the LED check, the LED in the upper area is displayed. Without starting the check, the door opening notification is continued, and the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) and a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white.

According to this example, some of the staging means (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. On the other hand, it is possible to urge the door to be closed to surely check the operation of the staging means, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means.

Further, since the door opening notification can be executed even during the LED check, it is possible to check the operation of the staging means while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, since the mode of the door opening notification and the LED check are different, the difference between the door opening notification and the operation check can be easily distinguished, and the convenience can be enhanced.

<Operation check / LED check in the upper area (door closed)>
11 (d) and 12 (a) to 12 (c) show that the door is closed, the LED check in the upper region is selected, and then the door is closed and the LED check in the upper region is executed. It is the figure which showed the flow in time series.

The state shown in FIG. 11D is a state in which the door is closed in the state where the LED check in the upper region is selected in the state where the door is closed as described with reference to FIG. 11C.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed in the state where the LED check in the upper region is selected, the door opening notification is terminated.

Further, since the LEDs in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) satisfied the operation check start condition (the front door 102 was closed and became the target of the operation check), the LED check in the upper region was performed. However, some of the LEDs in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) do not meet the operation check start condition (the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to the operation check). Then turn off the lights.

As described above, in the LED check in the upper region, the operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, the light emission based on the operation pattern in which blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → blue lighting → ... is repeated). Is feasible.

Specifically, in the LED check in the upper region, as shown in FIG. 11D, the LEDs in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are lit in blue for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). After the lapse of time, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the LEDs in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are turned on in red, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in FIG. 12 (b). As shown, the LEDs in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are lit in green, and thereafter, the lighting is repeatedly executed in this order.

<Operation check / LED check in the central area (door closed)>
In FIGS. 12 (c) and 12 (d) and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), when the door is closed, the LED check in the central region is selected during the LED check in the upper region, and the LED check in the central region is selected. It is a figure which showed the flow until is executed in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (c), the LED check in the central region was tentatively selected during the LED check in the upper region described with reference to FIGS. 11 (d), 12 (a), and 12 (b). FIG. 12 (d) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of the central region CE temporarily selected.

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (d), the LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect buttons 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) in the central region satisfy the operation check start condition (front door). Since 102 was closed and was subject to the operation check), the LED check in the central region is started.

As described above, in the LED check of a part of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central region, the operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, the operation pattern of blinking white) is used. It is possible to execute light emission based on, and in the LED check of some other LEDs (effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) in the central region, an operation based on a certain operation pattern (red in this example) is performed. It is possible to execute (light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → ...).

Specifically, in the LED check of a part of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central region, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), a part of the LEDs (navigation) in the central region. Lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) are turned on in white, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 13A, a part of the LED (navigation lamp) in the central region is used. 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) are turned off, and thereafter, white on and off are repeatedly executed.

Further, in the LED check of the other part of the LEDs in the central region (effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the other part of the LED in the central region (effect). Button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in red, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), some other LEDs in the central region (effect). Button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in blue, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), some other LED (effect button) in the central region. 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in green, and thereafter, the lighting is repeatedly executed in this order.

According to this example, the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, so that the convenience can be improved. Further, since the LEDs other than the LEDs that are the target of the operation check are turned off, the area that is the target of the operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check / LED check in the central area (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened when the LED check in the central region is being executed with the door closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening is started. In this example, the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) is started as the door opening notification. And a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) is lit in white.

While the door is closed, some LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) in the central region are repeatedly turned on and off in white, but the door opening notification is prioritized over the LED check. Therefore, while the door is open, the LED check (turning on and off in white) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c is interrupted, and the door opening notification (lights in white) is given priority.

According to this example, some of the staging means (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. , It is possible to urge the door to be closed to surely check the operation of the staging means, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means.

Further, since the door opening notification can be executed even during the LED check, it is possible to check the operation of the staging means while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, since the mode of the door opening notification and the LED check are different, the difference between the door opening notification and the operation check can be easily distinguished, and the convenience can be enhanced.

<Operation check / LED check in the central area (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 13D is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the LED check in the central region is being executed with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening has ended, the door opening notification (lights up in white) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c has ended, and the LED check (white) has ended. (Turning on and off) is restarting.

The LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c may be restarted from the beginning when the white lighting is started, or the white lighting may be restarted from the beginning, and the LED check (white lighting) may be performed while the door is open. (Turn off) may be executed in the background, and when the door is closed, it may be restarted from the state of being executed in the background (for example, in the middle of turning on the white color). That is, before the door is opened, the LED check (lighting mode) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148 are synchronized, but after the door is opened, only the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c is interrupted. After the door is closed again, the LED check (lighting mode) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148 may be asynchronous.

<Operation check / LED check in the lower area (door closed)>
14 (a) to 14 (c) show the flow until the LED check in the lower region is selected and the LED check in the lower region is executed during the execution of the LED check (door closing) in the central region. It is a figure.

The state shown in FIG. 14A is a state in which the LED check in the lower region is provisionally selected during the LED check in the central region, and FIG. 14B is a state in which the item in the lower region UE is provisionally selected. It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 14B, since the LED in the lower region (title panel 162) satisfies the operation check start condition (becomes the target of the operation check), the LED check in the lower region is started.

As described above, in the LED check of the LED (title panel 162) in the lower region, it is possible to execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, light emission based on an operation pattern in which white lighting and extinguishing are repeated). ..

Specifically, in the LED check of the LED in the lower region (title panel 162), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), after the LED in the lower region (title panel 162) is turned on in white, a predetermined time (for example, for example). After 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the LED (title panel 162) in the lower region is turned off, and then the white LED is turned on and off repeatedly.

According to this example, the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, so that the convenience can be improved. Further, since the LEDs other than the LEDs that are the target of the operation check are turned off, the area that is the target of the operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check / LED check in the lower area (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 14D is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the LED check in the lower region is being executed in the state where the door is closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 is opened, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening is started. In this example, the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) is started as the door opening notification. And a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) is lit in white.

On the other hand, since the LED in the lower region (title panel 162) is not affected by the opening and closing of the door, the LED check (white lighting and extinguishing) is continued even while the door is open.

<Operation check / Speaker check (door open)>
FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a state in which the speaker check SC item is tentatively selected in the operation check menu screen MCM described with reference to FIG. 8D.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the door opening notification for notifying the door opening is started. In this example, the LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) is started as the door opening notification. ) And a part of the LED in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white, and a door opening sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is output from a speaker (not shown). ing.

FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC temporarily selected on the operation check menu screen MCM.

When the speaker check SC item is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that the speaker is being checked (in this example, "speaker is being confirmed". (Display of the character string), and the speaker check is started.

In the speaker check of this example, the operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, the sound output of the lower right speaker → the sound output of the lower left speaker → the sound output of the upper speaker → the sound output of the lower right speaker →… is repeated. It is possible to execute (audio output based on the pattern).

Specifically, in the speaker check, as shown in FIG. 15B, a check sound (in this example, "lower right speaker test in progress" is performed from the lower right speaker arranged at the lower right front of the slot machine 100. (Voice) is output, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 15 (c), a check sound (in this example, " The sound "during the lower left speaker test") is output, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, a check sound (check sound) is output from the upper speaker arranged at the upper part of the slot machine 100 as shown in FIG. 15 (d). In this example, the sound "during the upper speaker test") is output, and thereafter, the sound is repeatedly output in this order.

In this example, since the door is being opened, the check sound by the speaker check is output in order from each speaker, and the door opening sound is output from all the speakers.

According to this example, in the operation check, the first certain effect means (LED) can switch the part to be the target of the operation check by the operation by the operation means, and the second certain effect means. In the operation check, the part of the (speaker) that is the target of the operation check is automatically switched regardless of the operation by the operation means. It is possible to isolate the production means to be performed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the operation check.

Further, during the operation check of the first staging means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of the second staging means, and during the operation check of the second staging means (speaker), the operation of the second staging means (speaker) is checked. Since it is impossible to check the operation of the first certain staging means, it is possible to more reliably check the operation of each staging means.

In addition, it is necessary to visually check the operation of the light emitting means (LED), and the operation check target can be manually switched to ensure the operation check, and the operation check of the sound output means (speaker) can be done by ear. All you have to do is check it, and you can easily switch the operation check target and easily perform the operation check.

Further, in the operation check, since the operation check sound can be output while outputting the door opening notification sound, the operation check can be performed at the same time while notifying the outside of the door opening, and the convenience can be enhanced.

<Operation check / Speaker check (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while the speaker check is being executed with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the output of the door opening sound is terminated, while the speaker check is not affected by the opening and closing of the door. continuing.

<Operation check / Operation of setting key>
16 (b) to 16 (d) show that the lever operation for confirming the setting is executed during the execution of the LED check (door opening) in the central region until the front door 102 is closed before the setting key is returned. It is a figure which showed the flow.

As described above, in the slot machine 100, when the pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135) is accepted in the setting change / setting confirmation mode, the set value is confirmed, the setting change is completed, and the setting key is turned off. When the front door 102 is closed in the state (the state in which the setting key is returned to the initial position), the state shifts to the normal game state in which the normal game is possible.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16D, the front door 102 is in a state where the setting key is on (a state in which the setting key is not returned to the initial position) during the execution of the LED check in the central region. Since it was closed, it does not shift to the normal game state and the demo screen is not displayed.

Since the operation check can be executed while changing the setting or checking the setting, the door may be closed by forgetting to change the setting of the original setting value, but with such a configuration, the setting screen Since it is possible to notify that normal games are not possible by continuously displaying, it may be possible to tell the clerk in the hall that he / she has forgotten to change the setting or forgot to remove the setting key.

17 (a) to 17 (c) are views showing the flow from returning the setting key to closing the front door 102 during the execution of the LED check (door opening) in the central region.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c), the front door 102 is in a state where the setting key is off (a state in which the setting key is returned to the initial position) while the LED check in the central region is being executed. Has been closed, so it has transitioned to the normal game state and is displaying the demo screen.

In addition, since the setting change / setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game state has been entered, the operation check (LED check and speaker check) is forcibly terminated, and the LED emits light for directing from the light emitted based on the LED check. The light emission is changed to the light emission based on the mode, and the speaker is changed from the sound output based on the speaker check to the sound output based on the effect sound mode.

According to this example, the operation check can be executed while the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed due to the operation of the setting key, and the operation check is performed in connection with turning the setting key from on to off during the operation check. Since it is finished, it can be finished without waiting for the completion of the operation check.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and a staging means (for example, an effect means). , Upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, speakers 272, 277, etc. A game table including a sound output means, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means is an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, in the case of an upper lamp 142 or a side lamp 144). Includes a certain effect means capable of executing (light emission based on an operation pattern of repeating blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ...), and the certain effect means is the game console. It is arranged at a position where the operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is possible from the front of the above, and a part of the certain staging means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title. The panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) can be checked for operation with the door open, and a part of the certain effect means (for example, the upper lamp 142, etc.). The side lamps 144 and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are game consoles characterized in that the operation check is impossible when the door is open.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of a part of the certain staging means with the door open, the door is given to the clerk of the game shop or the like. It is possible to urge the operation of the staging means to be surely performed by closing the door, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and an effect means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , Side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, It is a game table provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means is blue in the case of an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, an upper lamp 142 or a side lamp 144). A certain effect means capable of executing (light emission based on an operation pattern of repeating lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ...), the certain effect means from the front of the game table It is arranged at a position where operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is possible, and a part of the certain effect means (for example, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect). Buttons 192 and stop buttons 137 to 139) can be checked for operation in a state where the door is open, and a part of the certain staging means (for example, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.). The navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot perform the operation check when the door is open, and the operation check can be executed at least during the setting change and the setting confirmation. It is a featured game console.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of a part of the certain staging means with the door open, the door is given to the clerk of the game shop or the like. It is possible to urge the operation of the staging means to be surely performed by closing the door, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means. In addition, since the operation check can be performed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, only the clerk of the game store can check the operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting is changed unintentionally. In some cases.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and an effect means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , Side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, It is a game table provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means is blue in the case of an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, an upper lamp 142 or a side lamp 144). A certain effect means capable of executing (light emission based on an operation pattern of repeating lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ...). It is arranged at a position where an operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is possible, and is referred to as a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter referred to as "a first certain effect means", for example, each reel 110. The operation of the reel backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) of the 112 is open, and the operation can be checked. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "second certain staging means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamps 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first effect means and the second effect means are arranged in different areas in the game table, the operation check can be performed for each area, and the door is closed. In the present state, the first certain effect means and the second certain effect means arranged in the area where the operation check is not executed do not execute the operation based on the operation pattern. It is a game table characterized by this.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of a part of the certain staging means with the door open, the door is given to the clerk of the game shop or the like. It is possible to urge the operation of the staging means to be surely performed by closing the door, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means. Further, in the operation check, since a certain staging means arranged in the area where the motion check is not executed does not execute the motion based on a certain motion pattern, the staging means targeted for the motion check becomes easy to understand. , The operation check can be performed more reliably.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and an effect means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , Side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, staging button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, It is a game table provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means is blue in the case of an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, an upper lamp 142 or a side lamp 144). A certain effect means capable of executing (light emission based on an operation pattern of repeating lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ...). It is arranged at a position where an operation check (hereinafter, referred to as "operation check") is possible, and is referred to as a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter, referred to as "a first certain effect means", for example, each reel 110. The operation of the reel backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) of the 112 is open, and the operation can be checked. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "second certain staging means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamps 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first effect means and the second effect means are arranged in different areas in the game table, the operation check can be performed for each area, and the door is closed. In the state of being present, the first certain effect means and the second certain effect means arranged in the area where the operation check is not executed do not execute the operation based on the operation pattern. The second certain staging means is a game table characterized in that, in a state where the door is open, a door opening notification suggesting that the door is open can be executed. ..

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of a part of the certain staging means with the door open, the door is given to the clerk of the game shop or the like. It is possible to urge the operation of the staging means to be surely performed by closing the door, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means. Further, in the operation check, since a certain staging means arranged in the area where the motion check is not executed does not execute the motion based on a certain motion pattern, the staging means targeted for the motion check becomes easy to understand. , The operation check can be performed more reliably. Further, since the door opening notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the staging means while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and an effect means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , Side lamp 144, Navi lamps 149a to 149c, Reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, Title panel 162, Direction button 192, Light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, Sound output means such as speakers 272, 277, It is a game table provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means is blue in the case of an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, an upper lamp 142 or a side lamp 144). Lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → .... It is arranged at a position where an operation check (hereinafter, referred to as "operation check") is possible, and is referred to as a part of the certain effect means (hereinafter, referred to as "a first certain effect means", for example, each reel 110. The operation of the reel backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) of the 112 is open, and the operation can be checked. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "a second staging means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamps 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first staging means and the second staging means are arranged in different regions in the game table, the operation check can be performed for each region, and the door is opened. In the state of being present, the second certain staging means arranged in the area where the operation check is not executed can execute the door opening notification suggesting that the door is open. It is a featured game console.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of a part of the certain staging means with the door open, the door is given to the clerk of the game shop or the like. It is possible to urge the operation of the staging means to be surely performed by closing the door, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in the staging means. Further, since the door opening notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the staging means while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, the certain effect means include a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a navigation lamp 149a to 149c, a reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, a title panel 162, and the like. The effect button 192, the light emitting means such as the stop buttons 137 to 139, the sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277, and the display means such as the liquid crystal display device 157), and the plurality of light emitting means are the first light emitting means and the first light emitting means. The door of the first light emitting means (for example, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, stop button 137 to 139) including two light emitting means is opened. The operation check is possible in the state, and the second light emitting means (for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) executes the operation with the door open. The operation check is not possible, and the second light emitting means is a door opening notification suggesting that the door is open while the door is open (for example, FIG. 10 (for example, FIG. 10). The door opening notification shown in b) can be executed, and the door opening notification can be performed with an operation based on an operation pattern different from the certain operation pattern (for example, an LED in the upper region (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144)). It may be a part of the LED in the central region (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) lit in white).

With such a configuration, since the door opening notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the first light emitting means while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in different regions in the game table, the operation check can be performed for each region, and the second light emitting means is said to have the door closed. It may be possible to check the operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation even when the door is closed, so that the convenience can be improved.

Further, the light emitting means arranged in the region where the operation check is not executed may be turned off while the door is closed.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for the operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the first light emitting means arranged in the area where the operation check is not executed when the door is open is turned off, and the operation check is performed when the door is open. The second light emitting means arranged in the area where the above is not executed may execute the door opening notification.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for the operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the certain operation pattern is a blinking pattern in which the light emitting means is blinked in one or a plurality of colors (for example, an operation pattern in which blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → ... Is repeated). The door opening notification may be an operation of lighting the second light emitting means (for example, lighting in white) with a certain color.

With such a configuration, the difference between the door opening notification and the operation check can be easily distinguished, and the convenience can be enhanced.

Further, the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the setting can be changed when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). A part of the operation of changing the setting can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means can execute the setting of the operation check on the operation check setting screen (for example,). , The operation check menu screen MCM shown in FIG. 8D and the like can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed, the operation check setting screen disappears in connection with turning the setting key from on to off. Even when the door is closed after the effect display is started and the setting change is completed, the effect display is not started and the operation check setting screen is displayed when the setting key is off. It may be continuously displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to remember the work of changing the settings, and it may be possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a cross key 193b and an OK button 193a) and a directing means (for example, an upper lamp 142 and a side). Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display. A game table including a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the certain effect means is said. The operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is arranged from the front of the game table at a position where the operation check can be performed. The certain staging means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation check can be performed for each area. This is a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "the first staging means". For example, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a navigation lamp 149a to 149c, and reels of each reel 110 to 112. The light emitting means such as the backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) are the regions (for example, the upper region, the central region, and the lower region) that are the targets of the operation check in the operation check. ) Can be switched by an operation by the operating means, and a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "a second staging means"; for example, a sound output means such as a speaker 272, 277). ) Is a game table characterized in that, in the operation check, the area (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) to be the target of the operation check is automatically switched without being operated by the operating means. ..

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the operation check, the first certain staging means can switch the area to be the target of the operation check by the operation by the operation means, and the second one. In the operation check, the area subject to the operation check is automatically switched by the staging means regardless of the operation by the operation means. It is possible to isolate the desired production means and enhance the convenience of operation check.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a cross key 193b and an OK button 193a) and a directing means (for example, an upper lamp 142 and a side). Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display. A game table including a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the certain effect means is said. The operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is arranged from the front of the game table at a position where the operation check can be performed. The certain staging means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation check can be performed for each area. This is a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "the first staging means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, and the reels of the respective reels 110 to 112. The light emitting means such as the backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) are the regions (for example, the upper region, the central region, and the lower region) that are the targets of the operation check in the operation check. ) Can be switched by an operation by the operating means, and a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "a second staging means"; for example, a sound output means such as a speaker 272, 277). ) Automatically switches the area (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) to be the target of the operation check in the operation check regardless of the operation by the operation means, and the first certain effect means. During the operation check, the operation check of the second certain effect means is impossible, and during the operation check of the second certain effect means, the operation of the first certain effect means. It is a game table characterized by the fact that it cannot be checked.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the operation check, the first certain staging means can switch the area to be the target of the operation check by the operation by the operation means, and the second one. In the operation check, the area subject to the operation check is automatically switched by the staging means regardless of the operation by the operation means. It is possible to isolate the desired production means and enhance the convenience of operation check. Further, during the operation check of the first certain staging means, it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain staging means, and during the operation check of the second staging means, the first staging is performed. Since it is impossible to check the operation of the means, it is possible to more reliably check the operation of the individual staging means.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a cross key 193b and an OK button 193a) and a directing means (for example, an upper lamp 142 and a side). Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, effect button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display. A game table including a display means such as a device 157), wherein the effect means includes a certain effect means capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the certain effect means is said. The operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") is arranged from the front of the game table at a position where the operation check can be performed. The certain staging means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation check can be performed for each area. This is a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "the first staging means". For example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, and the reels of the respective reels 110 to 112. The light emitting means such as the backlight 148, the title panel 162, the effect button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) are the regions (for example, the upper region, the central region, and the lower region) that are the targets of the operation check in the operation check. ) Can be switched by an operation by the operating means, and a part of the certain staging means (hereinafter, referred to as "a second staging means"; for example, a sound output means such as a speaker 272, 277). ) Automatically switches the area (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) to be the target of the operation check in the operation check regardless of the operation by the operation means, and the operation check is the operation of the setting key. It is possible to execute at least one of the setting change and the setting confirmation accompanying the operation check, and the operation check ends in connection with turning the setting key from on to off during the execution of the operation check. It is a featured game console.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the operation check, the first certain staging means can switch the area to be the target of the operation check by the operation by the operation means, and the second one. In the operation check, the area subject to the operation check is automatically switched by the staging means regardless of the operation by the operation means. It is possible to isolate the desired production means and enhance the convenience of operation check. In addition, the operation check can be executed during the setting change or setting confirmation accompanying the operation of the setting key, and the operation check ends in connection with turning the setting key from on to off during the operation check. It can be completed without waiting for the completion of the operation check.

Further, the first certain effect means may be a plurality of sound output means capable of outputting sound, and the second certain effect means may be a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light.

With such a configuration, it is necessary to visually check the operation check of the light emitting means, the operation check target can be manually switched and the operation check can be surely performed, and the operation check of the sound output means can be performed by ear. All you have to do is check it, and you can easily switch the operation check target and easily perform the operation check.

Further, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, a front door 102) is provided, and the sound output means has a door opening notification sound (for example, a door opening notification sound) that suggests that the door is open while the door is open. A sound such as "the door is open" or a warning sound such as beep) can be executed, and the certain operation pattern can specify the area to be the target of the operation check (for example, the figure). It is an operation pattern in which the operation check sound including the sound (voice such as “lower right speaker test” → “lower left speaker test” → “upper speaker test”) shown in 15 is output from the sound output means, and is the door. The opening notification sound is a sound different from the operation check sound, and the sound output means can perform the operation check in a state where the door is open, and in the operation check, the door opening notification sound is emitted. It may be possible to output the operation check sound while outputting.

With such a configuration, it is possible to simultaneously perform an operation check while notifying the outside of the opening of the door, and it is possible to improve convenience.

Further, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, a front door 102) is provided, the plurality of light emitting means include a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means, and the first light emitting means has the door opened. The operation check may be possible, and the second light emitting means may not perform the operation while the door is open, and the operation check may not be possible.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous operations such as setting changes by closing the door to check the operation of the second light emitting means.

Further, with the door closed, the light emitting means arranged in the area not subject to the operation check may be turned off.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for the operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the operation check may be executed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

With such a configuration, only the clerk of the game store can check the operation.

Further, the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the setting can be changed when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). A part of the operation of changing the setting can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means can execute the operation check on the operation check screen (for example, FIG. 8). The operation check menu screen MCM) shown in (d) and the like can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed, the operation check screen disappears in connection with turning the setting key from on to off, and the effect related to the game is produced. Even when the door is closed after the display is started and the setting change is completed, the effect display is not started and the operation check screen continues even when the setting key is off. It may be displayed.

Since the operation check can be executed while changing the setting or checking the setting, the door may be closed by forgetting to change the setting of the original setting value, but with such a configuration, the setting screen Since it is possible to notify that normal games are not possible by continuously displaying, it may be possible to tell the clerk in the hall that he / she has forgotten to change the setting or forgot to remove the setting key.

Further, the "staging means" according to the present invention may be a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157 or a movable body such as a shutter 163.

Further, the game console according to the present invention is a game console capable of notifying a certain error, and the certain error is an error of at least one of a plurality of types of errors that can occur in the game console. If the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred and the certain error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, the setting key is pressed as part of the setting change operation. When the set value cannot be changed even by operation (hereinafter referred to as "first state") and the certain error does not occur when the power is turned on, the set value is set. A part of the setting change operation including a state in which the change is possible (hereinafter referred to as "second state") and a state in which the set value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "third state"). When the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed by the setting key, the second state is obtained, and when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the second state is obtained. In the third state, when the power is turned off in the state where the certain error has occurred and the power is turned on in the state where the certain operation is performed after the power failure, the first state is obtained. The game table may be characterized in that it is possible to shift to the third state when the certain error is resolved in the first state.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game console capable of notifying a certain error, and the certain error is caused in the game console. It is at least one of a plurality of types of errors that can occur (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.), and the above-mentioned error occurs. If the error continues when the power is turned off and the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the setting key is operated as part of the setting change operation (for example, the setting key switch is operated). Even if it is rotated and turned on), the set value cannot be changed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"; the setting cannot be changed), and the error occurs when the power is turned on. The state in which the setting value is not generated is referred to as a state in which the set value can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "second state") and a state in which the set value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "third state"). ) Is included, and when the power is turned on while a certain operation by the setting key is performed as a part of the setting change operation, the second state is reached, and after the power is turned on, the above or When the operation is performed, the third state is reached, the power is cut off in a state where the certain error has occurred, and after the power cut, the certain operation is performed as a part of the setting change operation. When the power is turned on in the broken state, the set value cannot be changed in the first state, and when the certain error is resolved in the first state, the set value is changed. It is possible to confirm the set value without shifting to a possible state, and after the notification of a certain error (for example, notification of a certain error) is started, the notification of the first state is notified. It may be a game table characterized by being started (for example, notifying a state in which the setting cannot be changed).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a situation occurs in which an error occurs after the operation of changing the set value is completed and the game is started, and the operation of changing the set value becomes useless. It can be avoided and workability can be improved. In addition, in order to notify that it is in the first state after the notification of a certain error is started, it is clearly notified that a certain error has occurred and that the set value cannot be changed. It is possible to improve workability. In addition, since the setting value can be confirmed without shifting to the state where the setting value can be changed after the error is resolved, it is possible to ensure that the setting cannot be changed even after the error is resolved. It is possible to surely confirm whether or not the set value has been changed to an erroneous value due to an error (whether or not it has malfunctioned), and workability can be improved.

<Bet number warning notification>
Next, the bet number warning notification will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. It should be noted that each figure of FIGS. 18 to 21 is a schematic view (front view) showing a main part of the slot machine 100.

<Bet number warning notification / notification means, display means, status notification means>
First, a notification means capable of executing the bet number warning notification will be described. The slot machine 100 according to this example includes a notification means capable of executing a bet number warning notification (warning notification) when a game with a bet number different from the recommended bet number is executed.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means capable of displaying as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, a payout number display device 127, a stored number display device 125, a game information display device 126, and the like described with reference to FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and an LED.

When the display means is applied as the notification means, for example, the liquid crystal display device 126 displays a character string such as "two-card betting game! Three-card bet!" While displaying the normal background, or the liquid crystal display. Displaying an image including a character string such as "Please play a three-card betting game" using all the display areas of the display device 126 corresponds to an example of the bet number warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 2.

When the sound output means is applied as the notification means, for example, a warning sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, a warning sound is output in connection with the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the start lever 135, and the like. Outputting sounds such as "Please bet two cards. Please be careful" and "Please play a three-card bet game" corresponds to an example of the bet number warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notifying means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include an upper lamp 142 described with reference to FIG. 1, a side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c for performing the above-mentioned operation navigation, and reel backlights of reels 110 to 112. Examples include 148, a title panel 162, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, a start lever 135, and the like. In this example, all of the light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When the light emitting means is applied as the notification means, for example, blinking the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, changing the emission color of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 are examples of the bet number warning notification. Applicable.

The title panel 162 of this example also functions as a state notification means provided at a position visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the title panel 162 (state notification means) can execute the first notification suggesting that it is in the first state and the second notification suggesting that it is in the second state. be.

<Bet number warning notification / playability>
Next, the playability of the slot machine 100 of this example will be described.

The slot machine 100 according to this example has a two-card bet recommended game (first state) in which a two-card bet game (first bet number) is recommended, and a three-card bet game (second bet number). It is composed of a three-card betting recommended game (second state) in which the game is recommended.

The first state is a normal game that shifts to the second state when a bonus (a certain internal winning combination) is internally won in a game by a two-card betting game (first bet number). On the other hand, the second state is an AT game in which a certain internal winning combination is not won in a game by a three-card betting game (second bet number), and the first state is better than the second state. Is a disadvantage for the player.

The states shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to (d), 19 (a) to (d), and 20 (a) are recommended two-card betting games (first state), and FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (b). (D), the states shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (b) are three-card betting recommended games (second state).

As described above, the title panel 162 of this example can execute the first notification suggesting that it is in the first state and the second notification suggesting that it is in the second state. Then, in the two-card betting recommended game (first state) shown in FIGS. 18A to 20A, the first notification is executed by turning off the title panel 162.

On the other hand, in the three-card betting recommended game (second state) shown in FIGS. 20 (b) to 21 (b), the second notification is executed by lighting the title panel 162 in the same notification mode as in the normal game. is doing.

The notification modes of the "first notification" and the "second notification" according to the present invention are not particularly limited, and for example, in the three-card betting recommended game (second state), the notification is different from the normal game. A second notification may be executed by executing the notification in the embodiment (for example, lighting the title panel 162 with a special light emission pattern).

Further, the "state notification means" according to the present invention is not limited to the title panel 162, and for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 described with reference to FIG. 1, and the navigation lamps 149a for performing the above-mentioned operation navigation. It may be a light emitting means such as 149c, a reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, a start lever 135, or a sound output means such as speakers 277 and 277. good.

<Bet number warning notification / Example>
Next, an embodiment of the bet number warning notification will be described.

<Bet number warning notification / Example / Two-card bet recommended game (first state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (d), 19 (a) to (d), and 20 (a) are recommended two-card betting games (first state), and are shown in FIG. 18 (a). In the state shown, the slot machine 100 after the initial shipment has started the recommended game of betting two cards (first state), and the bonus (certain internal winning combination) has not been internally won (bonus non-internal winning state). be.

This two-card bet recommended game (first state) is originally a state in which the player does not play a game, but a clerk at a game store or the like shifts to a three-card bet recommended game (second state). If there is no such game, the game is possible, and in addition to the fact that the AT lottery is not performed, even if a bonus is won in a 3-card betting game, the number of medals paid out by the bonus game is small, 3 This is a more disadvantageous condition for the player than the recommended betting game (second condition).

In this example, by turning off the title panel 162, the first notification suggesting that the current state is the two-card betting recommended game (first state) is started.

According to this example, the player or the game store states that the first state is not the originally recommended gaming state, and that if a warning is given in the second state, it is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suggested to the clerk of the store, and it is possible to prevent giving a disadvantage.

In the state shown in FIG. 18B, 13 medals (game media) are inserted, 3 medals are used as bets for the game, and the remaining 10 medals are electronically stored (credited). ..

In this example, the stored number display 125 displays a display indicating that the number of credits is 10 (in this example, a numerical value of "10").

The state shown in FIG. 18C is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation) in the three-card betting game.

In this example, when a 3-card bet game (a game with a second bet number) is executed in a 2-card bet recommended game (first state), the bet number warning notification (warning notification) is not executed. Therefore, the bet number warning notification is not executed here.

According to this example, when the game with the first bet number is executed in the second state, the warning notification is executed, and when the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state, the game is executed. Since the warning notification is not executed, it is possible to suggest the correct way of hitting to the player by giving the warning notification only in the second state that should be originally recommended, and give a bad impression to the second state. Can be prevented. Further, when the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state, it is possible to notice that the game is not in the second state by not executing the warning notification.

In addition, in the game, a specific winning combination (strong cherry in this example) is internally won, but in this example, the notice display is not displayed in the two-card betting recommended game (first state). Therefore, here, the advance notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is not executed.

According to this example, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort by not displaying the notice in the first state, and to make the clerk of the game store notice that he / she has forgotten to shift to the second state. Further, since it is possible to grasp the first state, it is possible to encourage the player, the clerk of the game store, or the like to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 18D is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed in the three-card betting game.

In this example, the specific winning combination (strong cherry) is won by performing the third stop operation while the specific winning combination (strong cherry) is internally won. When a 3-card bet game (a game with a second bet number) is executed in a 2-card recommended game (first state), the payout is not executed even if a specific winning combination is won. Since it is configured in, the payout is not executed here.

The state shown in FIG. 19A is a state in which two cards allocated from ten credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the stored number display 125 displays that the number of credits is 8 (= 10-2) (in this example, "8" is displayed numerically).

The state shown in FIG. 19B is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation) in the two-card betting game.

In this example, since the two-card betting game (the game with the first bet number) is executed in the two-card betting recommended game (first state), the bet number warning notification is not executed. In addition, since the bonus (a certain internal winner) has not been internally won, the bonus non-winning state is maintained.

The state shown in FIG. 19C is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed in the state of the two-card betting game and the winning combination non-winning state.

In this example, the payout is not executed because the winning combination was not won.

The state shown in FIG. 19D is a state in which two cards allocated from eight credit cards are used as the bet number of the game.

In this example, the stored number display 125 displays that the number of credits is 6 (= 8-2) (in this example, the numerical value of "6" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20A is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation) in the two-card betting game.

In this example, since the two-card betting game (game with the first bet number) is executed in the two-card betting recommended game (first state), the bet number warning notification is not executed, but a bonus (a certain internal) is executed. Since he was internally elected (winner), he has shifted from the non-bonus non-winning state to the bonus winning state.

<Bet number warning notification / Example / Recommended game for betting 3 cards (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (d) and 21 (a) to 21 (b) are three-card betting recommended games (second state), and the states shown in FIG. 20 (b) are two cards. It is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed in the betting game and the bonus internal winning state.

In this example, since the bonus is internally won when the lever is operated (during the internal lottery), the recommended game for betting 3 cards (first state) is triggered by the third stop operation of the game. By shifting to the first state) and lighting the title panel 162, a second notification suggesting that the current state is a three-card betting recommended game (second state) is started.

According to this example, it is possible to make the clerk of the game store notice that he / she has forgotten to shift to the second state. Further, since it is possible to grasp the first state, it is possible to encourage the player, the clerk of the game store, or the like to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a state in which 3 cards allocated from 8 credit cards are used as the bet number of the game.

In this example, the stored number display 125 displays that the number of credits is 5 (= 8-3) (in this example, the numerical value of "5" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20D is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed in the three-card betting game.

In this example, since the notice display can be displayed in the three-card bet recommended game (second state), here, the notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is executed. , We are paying out (4 cards in this example) corresponding to a specific winning combination (strong cherry).

The state shown in FIG. 21A is a state in which two cards allocated from nine credits are used as the number of bets for the game.

In this example, the stored number display 125 displays that the number of credits is 7 (= 9-2) (in this example, "7" is displayed numerically).

The state shown in FIG. 21B is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation) in the three-card betting game.

In this example, when the 3-card bet game (game with the second bet number) is executed in the 3-card bet recommended game (second state), the bet number warning notification (warning notification) is executed. Therefore, here, the bet number warning notification AR (in this example, the display of an image including a character string such as "two-card betting game! Three-card bet!") Is executed.

As described above, according to the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment, the notification means and the control for shifting to one of a plurality of types of states. A gaming table including means (for example, a control unit 300), wherein the plurality of types of states include a first state and a second state, and the first state is a first bet number. (For example, a two-card betting game) is recommended, and the second state is a state in which a second betting number game (for example, a three-card betting game) is recommended. The one bet number and the second bet number are different numbers, and the notification means warns about the bet number (for example, when a game is performed with a bet number different from the recommended bet number). , The bet number warning notification AR) shown in FIG. 21B is possible, and the notification means issues the warning notification when the game with the first bet number is executed in the second state. The notifying means is a gaming table characterized in that when the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state, the warning notification is not executed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the game with the first bet number is executed in the second state, the warning notification is executed, and the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state. If this is the case, the warning notification is not executed, so by issuing the warning notification only in the second state, which should be originally recommended, it is possible to suggest the correct way of hitting to the player, and for the second state. It is possible to prevent giving a bad impression. Further, when the game with the second bet number is executed in the first state, it is possible to notice that the game is not in the second state by not executing the warning notification.

Further, the first state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second state.

With such a configuration, the player or the player may know that the first state is not the originally recommended gaming state, and that if a warning is given in the second state, it is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suggested to the clerk of the game store, etc., and it is possible to prevent giving a disadvantage.

Further, the first state is a normal game that shifts to the second state when a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus) is internally won in the game with the first bet number, and the second state. The state of may be an AT game in which the certain internal winning combination is not won in the game with the second bet number.

Further, a state notification means (for example, the title panel 162 shown in FIG. 18) provided at a position visible to the player is provided, and the state notification means is a first state suggesting that it is in the first state. It is possible to execute the notification (for example, turn off the title panel 162) and the second notification (for example, turn on the title panel 162) suggesting that the second state is in the above-mentioned first notification. In connection with the internal winning of the certain internal winning combination in the first state, the notification mode is switched to the second notification, and the notification mode of the second notification is the same as the notification mode of the state notification means in the normal game. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the clerk of the amusement store aware that he / she has forgotten to shift to the second state. Further, since it is possible to grasp the first state, it is possible to encourage the player, the clerk of the game store, or the like to voluntarily shift to the second state.

Further, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the plurality of types of displays are shown in a background display (for example, FIGS. 18, 20, etc., where the palace and the old man are in the castle. The background display includes the background display showing the appearance of sitting in the room) and the notice display (for example, the notice effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) shown in FIG. 20 (d)), and the background display is the first. The first state and the second state are the same, and the notice display may be displayed in the second state and may not be displayed in the first state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort by not displaying the notice in the first state, and to make the clerk of the game store notice that he / she has forgotten to shift to the second state. Further, since it is possible to grasp the first state, it is possible to encourage the player, the clerk of the game store, or the like to voluntarily shift to the second state.

Further, in the first state, the first background display may be displayed, and in the second state, a second background display different from the first background display may be displayed, or the first background display may be displayed. The background display may be a background display that can be displayed only in the first state (background display dedicated to the first state). Similarly, regarding the notice display, even if the first notice display is displayed in the first state and the second notice display different from the first notice display is displayed in the second state. Alternatively, the first notice display may be a notice display that can be displayed only in the first state (notice display dedicated to the first state).

<Menu screen (setting screen)>
Next, the menu screen (setting screen) will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27.

The state shown in FIG. 22A is a state in which the power is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this example, since the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change / setting confirmation mode, and the menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Is displayed. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, the clerk of the amusement shop can display the setting change history, error history, system volume setting, power saving mode setting, or operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). It is possible to select any item.
According to this example, it is possible to execute various other settings as well as work such as setting change and setting confirmation, and it is possible to improve the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / system volume setting>
Next, the system volume setting will be described with reference to FIG. In the system volume setting, it is possible to set a maximum volume that can be set only by an administrator such as a clerk of a game store, an error sound that is output when an error (for example, opening of the front door 102) occurs, and the like.

FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a display example when the item of the system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen, and FIG. 22C is a state in which the item of the system volume setting SS is provisionally selected. It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a is pressed.

When the item of the system volume setting SS is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the system volume screen SSM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 22 (c). By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, the clerk of the game store adjusts the volume (administrator set volume) of the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277, etc.) on the system volume screen SSM. It is possible to do.

In this example, by pressing the right button of the cross key 193b, the administrator setting volume can be gradually increased in the order of volume 1 (minimum volume) → volume 2 → volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value). Yes, by pressing the left button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to gradually reduce the administrator setting volume in the order of volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value) → volume 2 → volume 1 (minimum volume). By pressing the OK button 193a, it is possible to set (store) the administrator set volume.

The sound pressures of the volumes 1 to 3 are not particularly limited, but for example, the sound pressure of the volume 1 is 80 dB, the sound pressure of the volume 2 is 90 dB, and the sound pressure of the volume 3 is 100 dB. Needless to say, the setting value of the administrator setting volume is not limited to three stages. Further, although an example of setting the maximum volume as an initial value is shown, it may be the minimum volume or another volume.

FIG. 22D is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 2 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, in the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. 22 (c), since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the temporary selection of the administrator-set volume is set to the volume from volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value). Since the OK button 193a was pressed after the change to 2, the temporarily selected volume 2 is set (stored) as the administrator-set volume.

Although not shown, an item for setting the system light intensity is added on the menu screen, and light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, effect button 192, stop button 137). It may be possible to adjust the light amount (administrator set light amount) of the light output from (139, title panel 162, etc.).

In this case, by pressing the right button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to gradually increase the amount of light set by the administrator in the order of light amount 1 (minimum light amount) → light amount 2 → light amount 3 (maximum light amount and initial value). By pressing the left button of the cross key 193b, the amount of light set by the administrator can be gradually reduced in the order of light amount 3 (maximum light amount and initial value) → light amount 2 → light amount 1 (minimum light amount), and it is OK. By pressing the button 193a, it may be possible to set (confirm) the amount of light set by the administrator.

The brightness of the light amount 1 to 3 is not particularly limited, but for example, the brightness of the light amount 1 is "dark (duty ratio 40%)", the brightness of the light amount 2 is "medium (duty ratio 70%)", and the light amount. The brightness of 3 is "bright (duty ratio 100%)". Needless to say, the set value of the light intensity set by the administrator is not limited to three stages. Further, although an example in which the maximum light amount is set as the initial value is shown, the minimum light amount may be used or any other light amount may be used.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / Power saving mode setting off → on>
Next, the power saving mode setting will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the power saving mode setting, it is possible to execute settings related to at least one of the volume and the amount of light. In this example, when the power saving mode is set to on, the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277, etc.) Change the volume, the amount of light output from the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.) and the brightness of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) to values suitable for power saving (lower the volume, stereo). It is possible to change the sound to monaural sound, reduce the amount of light and brightness, make the color monochromatic, switch static lighting to dynamic lighting, etc.).

The content of the power saving mode is not particularly limited, and for example, after the power saving mode is turned from off to on, when the non-gaming state elapses for a predetermined time, the power saving mode may be entered or the payment may be made. When the button is operated, it may be forcibly shifted to the power saving mode, or it may be configured not to shift to the power saving mode in a certain game state (for example, AT game or bonus game). The power saving mode may be entered even during the game, and the volume of the sound output means, the amount of light of the light emitting means, the brightness of the display means, and the like may be limited.

23 (a) and 23 (b) are diagrams showing a display example when the item of the power saving mode setting EM is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the system volume setting, and FIG. 23 (c) is a diagram showing a display example. It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM temporarily selected.

When the item of the power saving mode setting EM is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 23 (c). .. A game store clerk or the like can switch the power saving mode setting on and off on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 23 (d) is a diagram showing a display example in which the power saving mode setting is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM, and FIG. 24 (a) is a diagram showing the power saving mode setting on. It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which was done.

In this example, since the lower button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. 23 (c), the power saving mode setting is temporarily selected as shown in FIG. 23 (d). After changing from off to on and temporarily selecting the power saving mode setting on, as shown in FIG. 24A, the OK button 193a was pressed, so that the temporarily selected power saving mode setting on is saved. It is set (stored) as the power mode.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / Power saving mode setting on → System volume setting>
24 (b) and 24 (c) are diagrams showing a display example when the item of the system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting, and FIGS. 24 (d) are shown in FIG. 24 (d). It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of a system volume setting SS temporarily selected.

In this example, when the volume is set to volume 2 (certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting) and then the power saving mode is set from off to on as the power saving mode setting (second setting). In addition, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), the system volume setting (first setting) is invalidated, and the volume 2 (certain volume) is set to the volume 3 (initial value, maximum volume). is doing.

According to this example, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume setting (first setting) is invalidated, so while checking the volume and light amount set by the power saving mode, The volume can be reset, which enhances the convenience of the game store clerk, etc., and allows the game store clerk, etc. to check the balance with the volume and light amount set by the power saving mode. It is possible to encourage the work of resetting.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume set by the first setting is set to the maximum volume. It is possible to encourage the work of resetting the volume while checking the balance of.

<Menu screen (setting screen) / Power saving mode setting off → System volume setting>
FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 1 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, in the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. 22 (c), since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed, the temporary selection of the administrator-set volume is set to the volume from volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value). Since the OK button 193a is pressed after changing to 1, the temporarily selected volume 1 is set (stored) as the administrator-set volume.

25 (b) and 25 (c) are diagrams showing a display example when the power saving mode setting EM item is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the system volume setting, and FIG. 25 (d) is a diagram showing a display example. It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM temporarily selected.

When the item of the power saving mode setting EM is temporarily selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 25 (d). .. A game store clerk or the like can switch the power saving mode setting on and off on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 26A is a diagram showing a display example in which the power saving mode setting off is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM, and FIG. 26B is a diagram showing a display example in which the power saving mode setting off is set. It is a figure which showed the display example of the state which was done.

In this example, since the upper button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. 25 (d), the power saving mode setting is temporarily selected as shown in FIG. 26 (a). After changing from on to off and temporarily selecting the power saving mode setting off, as shown in FIG. 26B, the OK button 193a was pressed, so that the temporarily selected power saving mode setting off is saved. It is set (stored) as the power mode.

26 (c) and 26 (d) are diagrams showing a display example when the item of the system volume setting SS is temporarily selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting, and FIGS. 27 (a) are shown in FIGS. 27 (a). It is a figure which showed the display example after the OK button 193a was pressed with the item of a system volume setting SS temporarily selected.

In this example, in the state where the power saving mode is set to on, after setting the volume to volume 1 (certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting), the power saving mode setting (second setting) is performed. ), The system volume setting (first setting) is maintained when the power saving mode is set from on to off.

When the power saving mode is set to off, it is often not necessary to reset the volume, but according to this example, when the power saving mode is set from on to off, the volume setting is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the clerk of the game store.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a setting means (for example, a main control unit 300, a liquid crystal display) capable of executing a plurality of settings related to the game. A game console comprising device 157, a cross key 193b, an OK button 193a), wherein the plurality of settings include a first setting and a second setting, the first setting being a volume (eg, for example). , The volume output from the speakers 272 and 277) (for example, the system volume setting shown in FIG. 22 (b)), and the second setting is a setting related to the power saving mode (for example, FIG. 23 (b)). The power saving mode is set to the above, and the power saving mode is the volume and the amount of light (for example, the volume output from the speakers 272 and 277, the amount of light output from the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.)). Or, setting related to at least one of the display means (brightness of the liquid crystal display device 157) (for example, lowering the volume and the amount of light, increasing the volume to lower the amount of light, lowering the volume to increase the amount of light, and muting the sound output means). , Turn off the light emitting means, etc.), and after setting the volume to the first volume (for example, the initial value) as the first setting, turn off the power saving mode as the second setting. When set to on, the first volume is maintained, the volume is set to a second volume (for example, a volume other than the initial value) as the first setting, and then the second setting is described. The game console is characterized in that when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the second volume is changed to a different volume (for example, it is initialized to the maximum volume or the minimum volume).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume setting (first setting) is invalidated, so that the volume and the amount of light set by the power saving mode are disabled. It is possible to reset the volume while checking the above, which enhances the convenience of the clerk of the game store and balances the volume and the amount of light set by the power saving mode for the clerk of the game store. While confirming, it is possible to prompt the work of resetting the volume.

Further, when the power saving mode is set from off to on as the second setting after setting the volume to the initial value as the first setting, the initial value may be maintained. In this case, the initial value may be maintained. The initial value may be the maximum volume (or the minimum volume) of the volume that can be set as the first setting.

With such a configuration, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume according to the first setting is set to the maximum volume. It is possible to encourage the work of resetting the volume while checking the balance with the volume and the amount of light.

Further, in the state where the power saving mode is set to on, after setting the volume to the first volume as the first setting, the power saving mode is set from on to off as the second setting. If so, the first volume may be maintained (the first setting is not invalidated).

When the power saving mode is set to off, it is often not necessary to reset the volume, but with such a configuration, when the power saving mode is set from on to off, the volume setting is set. Since it is maintained, the burden on the clerk of the game store can be reduced.

Further, the setting by the setting means may be able to be executed at least one of the setting being changed and the setting being confirmed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute various other settings as well as work such as setting change and setting confirmation, and it is possible to improve the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like.

Further, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and a display means that can display a display related to the setting (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) are provided, and the setting key is turned from off to on. When the power is turned on in this state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the setting can be changed, and a part of the operation for changing the setting (for example, 1 is added for each setting value 1 to 6). The pressing operation by the setting switch for updating) can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means can execute at least one of the plurality of settings. The setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 22A) can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed (for example, after the pressing operation by the start lever 135 is accepted and the set value is confirmed), the setting is performed. The setting screen disappears in connection with turning the key from on to off, the effect display (for example, demo screen display or normal effect) is started (see, for example, FIG. 17 (c)), and the setting change is completed. Later, even when the door is closed, the effect display is not started and the setting screen is continuously displayed when the setting key is off (see, for example, FIG. 16D). ) It may be.

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, you may forget to change the settings of the original setting values and close the door, but with such a configuration, the setting screen Since it is possible to notify that normal games are not possible by continuously displaying, it may be possible to tell the clerk in the hall that he / she has forgotten to change the setting or forgot to remove the setting key.

In addition, when the setting key is turned from off to on after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the setting can be confirmed, and a part of the setting confirmation operation (for example, the setting value). The pressing operation by the setting switch for displaying the above can be performed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means can execute at least one of the plurality of settings. The setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 22A) can be displayed, and after the setting confirmation is completed, the setting screen disappears in connection with turning the setting key from on to off, and the game is played. Even when the door is closed after the effect display (for example, demo screen display or normal effect) is started (see, for example, FIG. 17 (c)) and the setting confirmation is completed, the setting key is pressed. In the off state, the effect display may not be started and the setting screen may be continuously displayed (see, for example, FIG. 16D).

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, you may forget to check the settings of the original setting values and close the door, but with such a configuration, the setting screen Since it is possible to notify that normal games are not possible by continuously displaying, it may be possible to tell the clerk in the hall that he / she has forgotten to confirm the setting or forgot to remove the setting key.

Further, while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the door may be notified by light or display, but the door may not be notified by sound.

With such a configuration, the work of changing the setting or confirming the setting can be executed in a quiet environment, and the convenience of the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be enhanced.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Various notification / notification means (display means)>
First, prior to the explanation of various notifications, the notification means included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 28A. FIG. 28 (a) is a schematic view (front view) of a main part showing the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 by extracting it.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means capable of displaying as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, a payout number display device 127, a stored number display device 125, a game information display device 126, and the like described with reference to FIG. In this example, these display means are composed of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Various notification / notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 2.

<Various notification / notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notifying means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, and a start lever described with reference to FIG. Examples thereof include 135 and the like, and in this example, any of the light emitting means is composed of an LED.

The effect button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of the light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include a frame lamp, an effect button, and an accessory.

<Various notification / setting change / setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to the explanation of various notifications, the setting change / setting confirmation mode will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment opens the front door 102 (door body) and turns on the power in a state where a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key provided inside the main body 101. When the setting value is turned on (or when the setting key is turned on from off before the specified time elapses after the power is turned on (before the control unit confirms the on / off status of the setting key)) It is possible to shift to a state where changes (setting changes) are possible (setting change mode).

Here, the setting change means to change the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the operation means (in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of the setting 1 to the setting 6) on the payout number display 127. Every time the pressing operation by the setting switch) is detected, the setting value 1 to 6 currently set is incremented and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly executed to return to 1. It is possible to change the set value with.

Further, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed and a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (on in this example). When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn off from is performed), the state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state in which normal gaming is possible. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "operation of removing the setting key after performing an operation of turning the setting key from on to off", but is "operation of turning the setting key from on to off". May be good.

When the operation of the operation means (start lever 135) is executed without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or by repeating the pressing operation of the operation means (setting switch), the set value is set once (for example). , Setting 5 → Setting 6 → Setting 1 → ... → Setting 5) When the operation of the operating means (start lever 135) is executed, the setting is the same as the previous setting.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, after the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on, a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key provided inside the main body 101. In case of failure, it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, the setting confirmation means to confirm the setting value of the game console, and in this example, the setting value (for example, setting 1) initially set by the pressing operation by the operation means (setting switch) or the setting value is confirmed. It is possible to confirm the set value by displaying the set value (any of the settings 1 to 6) set by the setting change on the payout number display 127.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning on / off is performed) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is set. The checkable state (setting confirmation mode) ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state in which normal game is possible. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "operation of removing the setting key after performing an operation of turning the setting key from on to off", but is "operation of turning the setting key from on to off". May be good.

In the specification of the present application, the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which the setting can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as the setting change / setting confirmation mode. , The setting change mode that can only change the setting, the setting confirmation mode that can only confirm the setting, and the mode that can change the setting and confirm the setting are included.

<Various notification / setting change modes>
Next, various notifications in the setting change mode will be described.

28 (b) to 30 (c) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of various notifications from the execution of the operation check and the setting change in the setting change mode to the transition to the normal game.

<Various notifications / door open → power on with setting change → shift to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 28B is a state in which a clerk of a game store opens the front door 102, turns on the power while the operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed, and shifts to the setting change mode. Is.

The slot machine 100 is turned on when the front door 102 (door body) is opened and a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key provided inside the main body 101 (the operation is turned on). Or, change the set value (change the setting) after the power is turned on and before the specified time has elapsed (before the control unit confirms the on / off status of the setting key) and the setting key is turned from off to on. ) Is possible (setting change mode).

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door body is open (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed is output. Instead of starting, the output of the notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state is started. Further, when the set value can be changed and the door body is open (first case), the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is the first display mode. Display with.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 28B is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so that the setting change notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed ( In this example, the opening notification sound (first sound) indicating that the door body is in the open state without starting the output of the voice of the person A saying "setting is being changed!" Shown in FIG. 28 (c). In this example, the voice of the person A saying "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating that the door is open can be made conspicuous. The clerk of the amusement shop can surely know that the door is open.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting changing display indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting changing"). In the first display mode (in this example, the display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image), the display including the display of the character string (displaying the character string) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Display on.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the setting is being changed. Therefore, the clerk of the game store is changing the setting by the display. Can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the door body is in the open state by using a part of the notification means. Is notified.

Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 28B, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red. Notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification) is performed.

According to this example, the clerk of the game store indicates that the door body is open while the setting is being changed by the light emitting means (the setting may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). Etc. can be surely notified.

The effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means in various settings and the like, and also a means that functions as a notification means capable of performing notification. However, as shown in FIG. 28B, a notification that performs open notification is performed. When it functions as a means, it is an operation means in which the operation becomes invalid.

<Various notification / setting change modes (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 28 (c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door is closed (second case), the output of the notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed is started. .. Further, when the set value can be changed and the door body is closed (second case), the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode. Display with.

Since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, the state shown in FIG. 28 (c) is a setting change notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed (in this example, “ The voice of person A) saying "Settings are being changed!" Is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described with reference to FIGS. 28 (b) and 28 (c), according to this example, in the door open state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, since the notification sound during the setting change is output, the state of the door opening and the door closing can be linked with the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting change, providing a game table with a characteristic notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open while the setting is being changed (the setting may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be surely notified that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door body is closed (second case), the setting changing display indicating that the set value can be changed (in the second case) is displayed. In this example, the display including the display including the character string "setting is being changed" is placed in the second display mode (in this example, the character string "setting is being changed" is placed in the upper left corner of the green background image. , The setting screen (first setting screen; display mode including the operation check setting screen) in which the operation check can be started is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Specifically, in the setting change mode of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a setting screen (first setting screen; operation check setting screen) at which an operation check can be started. By operating the cross key 193 (operation means), the clerk of the game store can arbitrarily select one of the speaker check, the character check, and the effect button check on the setting screen (first setting screen). It is possible to do.

According to this example, in the door open state during the setting change, the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, while the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, since the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode, the door is opened and the door is closed during the setting change. It is possible to easily grasp which state it is in.

Further, in this example, in the second display mode, the character string "setting is being changed" is displayed smaller than in the first display mode, but in the door closed state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is displayed. Is output, it is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game store that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

The items (first setting) that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example, and in addition to (or instead of) the exemplified items, for example, light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144. Operation check, operation check of a movable body described later using FIG. 38 and the like, light amount setting of light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144, volume setting of sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display device 157. Light intensity setting of display means such as, power saving mode setting, setting change history (date and time, setting value at the time of setting change), setting confirmation history (date and time, setting value at the time of setting confirmation), error that occurred in the past It may be a history or the like.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door closed) / operation check>
As described with reference to FIG. 8 and the like, the operation check is an operation pattern in which a certain effect means (one or a plurality of effect means) among a plurality of effect means included in the slot machine 100 is predetermined. It is a work of checking (inspecting) whether or not a certain staging means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether or not there is an abnormality) by operating based on.

The type of operation check is not particularly limited, but in this example, the speaker check, the accessory check, and the effect button check can be executed.

The speaker check is, for example, an operation pattern for outputting a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern for changing the volume and frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, and stopping (silence) the output of the sound from the sound output means. ) Speakers based on operation patterns, operation patterns that output sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, operation patterns that output sound only for some sound output means when there are multiple sound output means, etc. It is a work to check whether or not the sound output means such as 272 and 277 are operating according to the operation pattern.

The accessory check includes, for example, an operation pattern for lighting the LEDs constituting the light emitting means in a certain order, an operation pattern for blinking the LEDs constituting the light emitting means, an operation pattern for changing the color of the light emitting means, and a plurality of light emitting means. The upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the reels 110 to 112 are based on an operation pattern in which the light emitting means is made to emit light in a certain order, an operation pattern in which only a part of the light emitting means is displayed when there are a plurality of light emitting means, and the like. It is checked whether the light emitting means such as the reel backlight 148, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 are operating according to the operation pattern, and whether the movable body such as the shutter 163 is operating according to the operation pattern. It is a work to check.

The effect button check is based on, for example, an operation pattern of vibrating the effect button 192, an operation pattern of causing the light emitting means of the effect button 192 to emit light in a certain color, an operation pattern of blinking the light emitting means of the effect button 192 in a certain color, and the like. The work is to check whether the effect button 192 (operation means) is operating according to the operation pattern.

In this example, when the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state with the setting key turned on after shifting to the setting change mode, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is shown in FIG. 28 (c). The operation check setting screen is displayed.

On the operation check setting screen of this example, three speaker checks, accessory checks, and staging button checks are displayed, and it is possible to temporarily select any operation check item by operating the cross key 193 (operation means). When the effect button 192 is pressed with any of the operation checks temporarily selected, the corresponding operation check is started.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door closed) / speaker check start>
The state shown in FIG. 28D is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed with the speaker check item temporarily selected on the operation check setting screen, and the speaker check is executed.

In the speaker check of this example, first, among the speakers 272,277, the voice "It is the upper speaker" is output from the upper speaker arranged at the upper part of the main body 101, and then, among the speakers 272,277, among the speakers 272,277, the voice "It is the upper speaker" is output. The voice "It is a lower left speaker" is output from the lower left speaker arranged at the lower left of the main body 101, and finally, "lower right" is output from the lower right speaker arranged at the lower right of the main body 101 among the speakers 272 and 277. By outputting the voice "It is a speaker", the operation check of the speaker (speaker output means) is executed. Also, during the speaker check, the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the voice "setting is being changed!") Is interrupted.

According to this example, in the closed state of the door, the door is displayed to indicate that the set value can be changed in the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen in which the operation check can be started. In the closed state, the operation check of the staging means can be surely performed.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door closed) / speaker check completed>
The state shown in FIG. 28 (e) is a state in which the speaker check executed in FIG. 28 (d) has been completed.

In this example, since the speaker check is completed, the setting change notification sound (in this example, the voice "setting is being changed!") That was interrupted during the speaker check is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (front door closed) / effect button check start>
The state shown in FIG. 28 (f) is a state in which the effect button check is temporarily selected on the operation check setting screen, and the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) is a state in which the effect button check is temporarily selected. 192 is pressed and the effect button check is executed.

In the effect button check of this example, the operation check of the effect button 192 (operation means) is executed by vibrating the effect button 192 for a predetermined time. Also, during the effect button check, unlike the speaker check, the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the voice "setting is being changed!") Is continued.

According to this example, in the closed state of the door, the door is displayed to indicate that the set value can be changed in the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen in which the operation check can be started. In the closed state, the operation check of the staging means can be surely performed.

Further, since the effect button (operation means) also functions as a notification means for notifying the door opening, it is preferable that the operation check can be performed only in the door closed state, and the operation of the effect button (operation means) in the door closed state. You can make sure that the check is done.

The operation pattern of the effect button check is not limited to vibration, and the effect button 192 may be turned on or blinked in a predetermined pattern instead of (or in addition to) the vibration.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door closed) / effect button check completed>
The state shown in FIG. 29B is a state in which the effect button check executed in FIG. 29A has been completed.

In this example, since the effect button check is completed, the vibration of the effect button 192 is stopped, while the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the voice "setting is being changed!") Is continued.

<Various notification / setting change modes (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 29 (c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed"). The opening notification sound (first sound. In this example, the voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state is emitted from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the voice). At the same time as outputting, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

The effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operating means in various settings and the like, and is a means that functions as a notifying means capable of giving a notification. However, when the effect button 192 functions as a notifying means for performing an open notification, the operating means The operation as is invalid.

Further, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is the first display mode. (In this example, a display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door open) / setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 29 (d) is a state in which the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed.

In this example, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a pressing operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. After updating and changing the set value from setting 1 to setting 6, since the pressing operation by the operating means (start lever 135 in this example) was accepted, the set value is confirmed to setting 6 and the payout number display 127 The number "06" is displayed in.

Also, in the same state, since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change completion display indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed (in this example). , A screen in which the character string "setting change completed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In this example, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the output of the opening notification sound (the voice "the door is open") is continued, but the operation means (this). In the example, when the pressing operation by the start lever 135) is accepted, the output of the opening notification sound is interrupted, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting change completion notification sound indicating that the setting change is completed (for example, "setting change") It may be configured to restart the output of the open notification sound after outputting the voice) "is completed" from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Various notifications / setting change mode (door open) / end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 29 (e) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is terminated.

In the same state, the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) is terminated, and the normal gaming state in which the normal game is possible is entered. Therefore, the setting change completion display is terminated and the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Display in the display area. Since the front door 102 is in the open state, the output of the opening notification sound (the voice "the door is open") continues.

<Various notifications / normal game status (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 29 (f) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is neither in the open state nor in the setting change mode, the setting changing display by the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. No, the opening notification is not performed by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192.

<Various notifications / normal game status (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 30A is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal gaming state.

In the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the first sound (this example) indicates that the door body is in the open state. Then, when the sound of person A saying "the door is open") is output and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the door body is opened. The notification sound indicating the state is output as the second sound (in this example, the voice of the person B saying "The door is open").

In the state shown in FIG. 30A, since the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) is terminated and the front door 102 is open in the normal gaming state, the door body is in the open state. An open notification sound (second sound. In this example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are output. , The effect button 192 blinks in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the second sound different from the first sound output in the state in which the set value can be changed is the second. Since the sound of is output, it is possible to make the clerk of the amusement shop or the like recognize again that the setting change is completed by changing the output sound. Also, since it is possible to check the operation when the door is closed, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the setting was changed when the operation check was executed, but the setting can be changed by the second sound. It is possible to make the clerk of the amusement store recognize that the completion is completed again.

<Various notifications / normal game state (door open state → door closed state → medal insertion)>
The state shown in FIG. 30B is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal gaming state, and the state shown in FIG. 30C is a medal in the closed state of the front door 102. Is in the state of being put in.

In this example, since the front door 102 is closed and the medal is inserted in the normal game state, the demo screen is terminated, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is displayed. Has started.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment can be opened and closed with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. Door body (for example, front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144). , Reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key. When the power is turned on in the broken state, the set value can be changed (for example, the setting change mode), and the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277). The sound output means is in a state where the set value can be changed and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case". For example, the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28B). When the front door 102 is open), the means for not executing the output of the notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed, and the sound output means is the first case. When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”; for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28 (c)). , Starts (or can start) the output of the notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed (for example, the voice of the person A saying "setting is being changed!" As shown in FIG. 28 (c)). It is a game table characterized by being a means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the notification sound during the setting change is not output when the door is open while the setting is being changed, while the notification sound during the setting change is output when the door is closed while the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to link the state of the door opening and the door closing with the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting change, and it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open while the setting is being changed (the setting may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be surely notified that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means is a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (for example, a person A who says "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 28 (b). It may be a means for executing the output of the voice).

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating that the door is open can be made conspicuous. Yes, the clerk of the game store can know the door opening without fail.

Further, the notification means is a means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means is a display indicating that the set value can be changed in the first case (for example). For example, it is a means for displaying a display including (display of a character string "setting is being changed"), and the display means displays a display indicating that the set value can be changed in the second case. It may be a means for displaying the including display.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the setting is being changed. You can be sure that something is happening visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the set value can be changed in the first display mode (for example, the yellow background image shown in FIG. 28B). It is a means for displaying in a display mode) in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center, and the display means is a display indicating that the set value can be changed in the second case. Is placed in the second display mode (for example, the character string "setting is being changed" in the upper left corner of the green background image shown in FIG. 28 (c), and the operation check can be started on the setting screen (operation check setting). It is a means for displaying in a display mode) including a screen), and the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and a certain effect capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern. A position including means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button), and the effect means capable of checking the operation (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") from the front of the game table. The second display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen capable of starting the operation check.

With such a configuration, in the door open state during the setting change, the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, while the setting is being changed. In the door closed state, the display including the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode. Therefore, during the setting change, the door is opened and the door is displayed. It is possible to easily grasp which state is closed. Further, in the door closed state, in the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen in which the operation check can be started, the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed. Therefore, in the door closed state, the setting value is displayed. It is possible to reliably check the operation of the staging means.

Further, at least a part of the certain effect means (for example, an effect button) is a means that functions as the notification means capable of notifying that the door body is in the open state in the first case. You may.

With such a configuration, it is preferable that the means that also functions as the notification means for notifying the opening of the door can check the operation only in the closed state of the door, and the operation check of the means is surely performed in the closed state of the door. Can be done.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as the first sound (for example, “the door is open” shown in FIG. 28 (b). It is a means for outputting by the voice of the person A), and the sound output means is when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. A means for outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as a second sound (for example, the sound of the person B saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 30A). The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be changed ends, it is different from the first sound output in the state where the set value can be changed. Since the second sound is output, it is possible to make the clerk of the game store or the like recognize again that the setting change is completed by changing the output sound. Also, since it is possible to check the operation when the door is closed, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the setting was changed when the operation check was executed, but the setting can be changed by the second sound. It is possible to make the clerk of the amusement store recognize that the completion is completed again.

<Various notification / setting confirmation modes>
Next, various notifications in the setting confirmation mode will be described. 30 (b) to 32 (f) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of various notifications from the execution of the operation check and the setting confirmation to the transition to the normal game in the setting confirmation mode.

<Various notifications / door open → power on>
The state shown in FIG. 30D is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the speaker 272 emits an opening notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state. , 277 is repeatedly output, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification). In this example, the opening notification is not performed by the effect button 192.

<Transition to various notification / setting confirmation modes>
The state shown in FIG. 30E is a state in which the setting key is turned from off to on after the power is turned on, and the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode.

The slot machine 100 opens the front door 102 (door body), turns on the power, and then performs a certain operation (operation from off to on) by the setting key provided inside the main body 101. , It is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed is output. Instead of starting, the output of the notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state is started. Further, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the display including the display indicating that the set value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode. Display with.

Since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the state shown in FIG. 30 (e) is a setting confirmation notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed (in this example, FIG. The opening notification sound (first sound. In this example, the door is open) indicating that the door body is in the open state without starting the output of the voice "setting is being confirmed!" The voice of person A saying "I'm open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the door opening is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating the door opening can be made conspicuous. The clerk of the amusement shop can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation") indicating that the set value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode (gray in this example). In the display mode) in which the character string "setting is being confirmed" is arranged in the upper left corner of the background image of the above, the display is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is not output, but the setting confirmation is displayed. Therefore, the clerk of the game store is confirming the setting by the display. Can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the door body is in the open state by using a part of the notification means. Is notified.

In the state shown in FIG. 30 (e), since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are blinking in red, and the front door 102 is in the open state. Notification (open notification) is performed.

According to this example, the clerk of the amusement shop indicates that the door body is open during the setting confirmation by the light emitting means (the setting confirmation is performed or there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed). Etc. can be surely notified.

In the setting confirmation mode, the opening notification is not performed by the effect button 192. Therefore, unlike the setting change mode, the operation check of the effect button 192 (effect) even when the front door 102 is in the open state. Button check) is possible, and the effect button 192 can also be operated as an operation means.

Further, the slot machine 100 is closed when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is open (first case), or when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is closed. In any case when the status changes (second case), the setting confirmation display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed (in this example, the character string "setting confirmation" is displayed). The display including the third display mode (in this example, the character string "setting is being confirmed" is placed in the upper left of the gray background image, and the setting screen (second setting screen) in which various settings can be made is displayed. Including the display mode), the display is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Specifically, in the setting confirmation mode of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a setting screen (second setting screen) in which various settings can be made. By operating the cross key 193 (operation means), the clerk of the game store can set the volume, the setting change history (date and time, the setting value at the time of setting change, etc.), and the error on the setting screen (second setting screen). It is possible to arbitrarily select any item of history (type of error that occurred in the past, date and time of occurrence, etc.) and time setting.

According to this example, since various settings can be made even when the door body is open while the setting is being confirmed, there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which is convenient for a game store clerk, etc. Work efficiency can be improved.

The items (second setting) that can be selected in the setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example, and in addition to (or instead of) the exemplified items, for example, light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144. Operation check, operation check of a movable body described later using FIG. 38, etc., light amount setting of light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144, light amount setting of display means such as liquid crystal display device 157, power saving mode setting. , Setting confirmation history (date and time, setting value at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), operation check, etc. may be performed.

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open) / volume setting>
The state shown in FIG. 30F is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed with the volume setting item temporarily selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and the volume setting screen is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 31A is a state in which an operation of increasing the volume by one step is performed in the volume setting.

In the volume setting of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277. When the right button of the cross key 193 (operating means) is pressed once while the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 30 (f) is displayed, the volume currently set (in this example, level 3) is pressed. ) Is raised by one step, and as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (level 4 in this example) is displayed.

In this example, the output of the open notification sound (the voice saying "the door is open") is continued even while the volume is set, but since the volume is adjusted from level 3 to level 4 by the volume setting, The open notification sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 at the adjusted level 4 volume.

Further, although not shown, if the left button of the cross key 193 (operating means) is pressed once while the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 30 (e) is displayed, the setting is currently set. The volume (for example, level 3) is lowered by one step, and a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (for example, level 2) is displayed.

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open) / end of volume setting>
The state shown in FIG. 31B is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed on the volume setting screen and the volume setting is completed.

In the same state, the volume is determined by pressing the effect button 192, and since the volume setting is completed, the volume setting screen is changed to the setting screen (second setting screen), while the opening notification sound ("door is Continue to output the voice) "Open."

<Various notification / setting confirmation mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 31 (c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed is heard. Starts outputting. When the set value can be confirmed and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state. Similar to (the first case), a display including a display indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state is displayed in the third display mode.

Since the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, the state shown in FIG. 31 (c) is a setting confirmation notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed (in this example, " The voice "Checking the settings!") Is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described with reference to FIGS. 30 (e) and 31 (c), according to this example, in the door open state during setting confirmation, the notification sound during setting confirmation is not output, but the setting is being confirmed. In the door closed state, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is output, so that the door open and door closed states and the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting confirmation can be linked, and the game console has a feature in the notification means. Can be provided. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open during the setting confirmation (the setting confirmation may have been performed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, it is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like of the game store that the setting confirmation has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation display indicating that the set value can be confirmed (in this example, "setting confirmation"" is displayed. The display area including the display of the character string (display of the character string) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the third display mode (in this example, the display mode in which the character string “setting is being confirmed” is arranged in the upper left of the gray background image). Display on.

According to this example, when the door is closed while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is output and the setting confirmation is displayed. It can be surely grasped visually.

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door closed) / error history display>
In the state shown in FIG. 31 (d), the effect button 192 is pressed with the error history item temporarily selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and the state shown in FIG. 31 (e) is an error. The history display is displayed.

In the error history display of this example, it is possible to display history information (in this example, the history of past errors that have occurred in the slot machine 100) indicating the past history of the game console. In the example shown in FIG. 31 (e), it is confirmed by the error history display that the hopper error occurred at 10:38 on September 15 and the selector error occurred at 23:45 on September 22. Is possible.

Further, since the states shown in FIGS. 31 (d) and 31 (e) are both in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, "setting" is displayed even while the setting screen or the error history display is being displayed. Continue to output the voice) "Confirming!".

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (front door open) / end of error history display>
The state shown in FIG. 31F is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed in the error history display and the error history display is completed.

In the same state, since the error history display is terminated by pressing the effect button 192, the error history display is terminated and the screen returns to the setting screen (second setting screen), while the setting confirmation mode is set. , Continues to output the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, the voice "Setting is being confirmed!").

<Various notification / setting confirmation modes (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 32A is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the setting confirmation mode.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state in the setting confirmation mode, the opening notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state (first sound. In this example, "the door is open". The voice) is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

<Various notifications / setting confirmation mode (door open) / end of setting confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 32 (b) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting confirmation mode is terminated.

In the same state, the setting confirmation mode (the state where the set value can be confirmed) is terminated, and the normal game state where normal game is possible is entered. Therefore, the setting screen (second setting screen) is terminated and the demo screen is displayed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the front door 102 is in the open state, the output of the open notification sound (the voice "the door is open") continues.

<Various notifications / normal game status (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 32 (c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is neither in the open state nor in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation display by the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting confirmation notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. No, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 is not performed.

<Various notifications / normal game status (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 32 (d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal gaming state.

When the slot machine 100 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the first sound (this example) indicates that the door body is in the open state. Then, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed is completed, the door body is in the open state. The notification sound indicating that is output as the second sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open").

In the state shown in FIG. 32 (d), since the setting confirmation mode (the state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed and the front door 102 is open in the normal gaming state, the door body is in the open state. The open notification sound (second sound. In this example, the voice of the person B saying "The door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp are output. 144 is blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be confirmed ends, the second sound different from the first sound output when the set value can be confirmed is the second. Since the sound of is output, it is possible to make the clerk of the amusement shop or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation is completed by changing the output sound. Also, if you make various settings, you may forget whether or not you have confirmed the settings, but let the clerk of the game store recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed by the second sound. Can be done.

<Various notifications / normal game status (door open → door closed → medal inserted)>
The state shown in FIG. 32 (e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal gaming state, and the state shown in FIG. 32 (f) is a medal in the closed state of the front door 102. Is in the state of being put in.

In this example, since the front door 102 is closed and the medal is inserted in the normal game state, the demo screen is terminated, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is displayed. Has started.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment can be opened and closed with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. Door body (for example, front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144). , Reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, from off to on) by the setting key after the power is turned on. When the operation is performed, the set value can be confirmed (for example, the setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is a means including a sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277). The sound output means is in a state where the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”. For example, in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30 (e)). When the front door 102 is open), it is a means for not executing the output of the notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed, and the sound output means is the first case. When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"; for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 31 (c)). The output of the notification sound indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state (for example, the voice of the person A saying "setting is being confirmed!" As shown in FIG. 31 (c)) is started (or can be started). ) It is a game table characterized by being a means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is not output in the door open state during the setting confirmation, while the notification sound during the setting confirmation is output in the door closed state during the setting confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to link the state of the door opening and the door closing with the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting confirmation, and it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open during the setting confirmation (the setting confirmation may have been performed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, it is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like of the game store that the setting confirmation has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means is a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (for example, a person A who says "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 30 (e). It may be a means for executing the output of the voice).

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating that the door is open can be made conspicuous. Yes, the clerk of the game store can know the door opening without fail.

Further, the notification means is a means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means is a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed in the first case (for example). For example, it is a means for displaying a display including the display of a character string "setting is being confirmed"), and the display means displays a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed in the second case. It may be a means for displaying the including display.

With such a configuration, when the door for setting confirmation is opened, the notification sound during setting confirmation is not output, but the display during setting confirmation is performed. Can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed as a third display mode (for example, "setting is being confirmed" in the upper left of the gray background image. It is a means for displaying in a display mode in which a character string is arranged), and the display means displays a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed in the third display mode in the second case. The third display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen in which various settings can be made.

With such a configuration, various settings can be made even when the door is open while the settings are being confirmed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door, which is convenient for game store clerks and the like. It is possible to improve the sex and work efficiency.

Further, the display means is in a state where the set value can be changed and the door body is in a closed state (hereinafter, referred to as “third case”. For example, the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28 (c)). When the front door 102 is closed), the display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode (for example, the upper left of the green background image shown in FIG. 28 (c)). It is a means to place the character string "setting is being changed" in the corner and display it on the setting screen (display mode including the operation check setting screen) where the operation check can be started, and the operation based on a certain operation pattern is performed. A certain effect means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button) that can be executed is provided, and the certain effect means checks the operation from the front of the game table (hereinafter, referred to as "operation check"). The second display mode is a display mode including a setting screen capable of starting the operation check, and is set on the setting screen in the third case. Possible items (for example, operation check such as speaker check, accessory check, effect button check, etc.) and items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case (for example, volume setting, setting). The change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting) may be different.

With such a configuration, items that can be set in the setting change and items that can be set in the setting confirmation can be individually provided, and the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

Further, the item that can be set on the setting screen in the third case may be the operation check.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check at a setting change that is executed less frequently than a setting check, so that the number of times the operation check is executed does not increase more than necessary, and the work efficiency of a game store clerk or the like does not increase. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case are settings that are initialized when the setting value is changed (for example, volume setting, power saving mode). Settings) may be included.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set the door body whether it is open or closed while checking the setting, so even if the setting is initialized when the setting value is changed, the door body can be set. There is no need to temporarily close the door, and the convenience and work efficiency of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as the first sound (for example, "the door is open" shown in FIG. 30 (e). It is a means for outputting by the voice of the person A), and the sound output means changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed is completed. In this case, a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state is output as a second sound (for example, the sound of the person B saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 32 (d)). The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be confirmed ends, it is different from the first sound output in the state where the set value can be confirmed. Since the second sound is output, it is possible to make the clerk of the game store or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation is completed by changing the output sound. Also, if you make various settings, you may forget whether or not you have confirmed the settings, but let the clerk of the game store recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed by the second sound. Can be done.

<Various notification / release notification sound modification examples>
Next, a modified example of the open notification sound will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (e) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example of various notifications from the end of the setting change to the transition to the normal gaming state (demo screen) in the setting change mode.

The state shown in FIG. 33A is a state in which the front door 102 is opened, the power is turned on with the operation of turning the setting key from off to on, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. It is the same as the state described using b).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed!") Is output indicating that the setting value can be changed. Opening notification sound (first sound. In this example, "Door is open → Door is open →… → Door is open" without starting The repeated voice) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The opening notification sound of this example is a sound (repeated sound) in which a sound (certain sound) that "the door is open" is repeatedly output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a certain sound. It may be a sound with a pattern in which the sound is repeatedly output. For example, a sound with a pattern in which the voice "Please close the door" (a certain sound) is repeatedly output ("Please close the door → Close the door". Please →… → Please close the door ”), or the sound of the pattern in which“ ping pong (onomatopoeia) ”is repeatedly output (“ping pong (onomatopoeia) → ping pong (onomatopoeia) →… → ping pong (onomatopoeia)” (Voice) may be used. It may be a melody or a musical piece, or it may be a sound composed of voice and a combination thereof, for example, "Please close the door-> (melody)-> close the door-> (melody) ...". May be good.

The following state shown in FIG. 33 (b) is a state in which the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, and is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 29 (d).

In the same state, since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change completion display indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed (yellow in this example). A screen in which the character string "setting change completed" is arranged in the center of the background image of the above is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the front door 102 is open, the opening notification sound ("door is The output of the repeated voice) "Open → Door is open →… → Door is open" is continued.

The following state shown in FIG. 33 (c) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is terminated. , The same as the state described with reference to FIG. 29 (e).

The slot machine 100 is configured to output a certain sound from the beginning at the timing when a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) ends. There is.

In the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) is terminated, and the normal gaming state in which the normal game is possible is entered. Therefore, the setting change completion display is terminated and the demo screen is displayed. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an opening notification sound (repeated voice of "door is open → door is open → ... → door is open") is output from the beginning. ..

Here, "the opening notification sound (repeated voice of" the door is open → the door is open → ... → the door is open ") is output from the beginning" means "the door is open". If the setting change mode (the state where the setting value can be changed) ends immediately after outputting the voice "Door is open" while outputting the voice "Yes", for example, at this end timing. By restarting the open notification sound, it is possible to output the voice (certain sound) that "the door is open" from the beginning without outputting the remaining voice "doing" that has not been output. means.

According to this example, when a certain sound is output (restarted) from the beginning, a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed). It is possible to grasp that the game has been completed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk of the game store.

It should be noted that the restart of a certain sound may be in a mode in which the timing at which the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed can be reliably notified by the sound. Therefore, for example, a certain sound may be played from the middle, and in this case, when the certain sound is the voice "the door is open", it restarts from the voice "is open". You may. In addition, the sound (for example, "open") after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the sound output at the timing when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed (for example, the voice "to" of "door") You may restart from the voice of "ka").

The state shown in FIG. 33 (d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game state is entered, and FIG. 29 (f) is used. Same as described.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is neither in the open state nor in the setting change mode, the setting changing display by the liquid crystal display device 157 is not displayed, and the opening notification sound and the setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. No, the opening notification is not performed by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192.

The state shown in FIG. 33 (e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal gaming state, and is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 30 (a).

When the slot machine 100 is in a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) and the door body is in the open state (first case), the door The first sound is the opening notification sound that indicates that the body is in the open state (in this example, the repeated sound that "the door is open → the door is open →… → the door is open") Is output with, and when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either the state where the set value can be changed or the state where the set value can be confirmed) is completed, the opening notification is given. The sound is output as the second sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open").

In the state shown in FIG. 33 (e), the setting change mode (the state in which the set value can be changed) is terminated, and the front door 102 is open in the normal gaming state, so that the door body is in the open state. The opening notification sound (second sound. In this example, the voice "The door is open") is output from the speaker 272,277, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are red. Flashes with, and gives a notification (opening notification) indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state.

According to this example, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed. Since a second sound different from the first sound output in a certain state is output, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like again recognizes that the certain state is completed by changing the output sound. Can be made to. Also, when you execute various settings, you may forget whether you changed the settings or confirmed the settings, but the clerk of the game store, etc., tells you that the setting changes and setting confirmations have been completed by the second sound. Can be recognized again.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment can be opened and closed with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. Door body (for example, front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144). , Reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key. When the power is turned on in the broken state, the set value can be changed (for example, the setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, from off to on) by the setting key is performed. When the operation is performed, the set value can be confirmed (for example, the setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is a means including a sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277). The sound output means is in a certain state and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case". For example, the front door 102 is opened in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 33A). (When the door is open), the output of the opening notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state (for example, the voice of the person A saying "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 33A) is started. The certain state is either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed, and the open notification sound is used. Is a pattern sound that outputs a certain sound (for example, "the door is open") (for example, "Please close the door → Please close the door →… → Please close the door" The sound output means outputs the certain sound from the beginning at the timing when the certain state ends (for example, the timing when the setting key is removed as shown in FIG. 33 (c)). It is a game table characterized by being a means (which can be output).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a certain sound is output (restarted) from the beginning, so that a certain state (a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) can be confirmed. It is possible to grasp that any of the states) has been completed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk of the game store.

Further, the notification means is a means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the sound output means is a notification sound (for example, for example) indicating that the state is in the first case. It is a means that does not output the voice "setting is being confirmed!" Or the voice "setting is being confirmed!"), And the display means is a display indicating that the state is in the first case. It may be a means for displaying a display including (for example, display of a character string "setting is being changed" or display of a character string "setting is being confirmed").

With such a configuration, when the door is opened in a certain state, a notification sound indicating that the state is in a certain state is not output, but a display indicating that the state is in a certain state is displayed. Can be visually and surely grasped as a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) by the display.

Further, the sound output means is a means for outputting the opening notification sound with the first sound (for example, the sound of the person A saying "the door is open") in the first case, and the sound. When the door body is changed from the closed state to the open state after the certain state is completed, the output means makes the open notification sound a second sound (for example, "the door is open". It is a means for outputting by the voice of the person B), and the first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed. In addition, in order to output a second sound different from the first sound output in a certain state, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like again tells that the certain state is completed by changing the output sound. , Can be recognized. Also, when you execute various settings, you may forget whether you changed the settings or confirmed the settings, but the clerk of the game store, etc., tells you that the setting changes and setting confirmations have been completed by the second sound. Can be recognized again.

Further, when the set value can be changed and the door body is closed, the operation check shown in FIG. 28 (c) shows the first setting screen in which the first setting can be set. When the display of the setting screen including the screen) is started and the setting value can be changed and the door body is open, the display of the first setting screen is not started and the setting value is not started. When the door body is in the closed state and / or in the open state, the second setting screen (for example, the volume setting shown in FIG. 30E) where the second setting is possible is possible. The display of the setting screen) is started, and the first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With such a configuration, items that can be set in the setting change and items that can be set in the setting confirmation can be individually provided, and the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

The above-mentioned "timing at which a certain state ends" is "the timing at which the certain operation by the setting key is completed after changing the set value" in a state where the set value can be changed. In the state where the set value can be confirmed, it may be "the timing when the certain operation by the setting key is completed while the set value is displayed".

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values and a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example). For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and the notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight). A game console equipped with 148, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, a start lever 135, etc., in a state where a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed by a setting key. When the power is turned on, the set value can be changed (for example, the setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, the operation from off to on) by the setting key is performed. When this is done, the set value can be confirmed (for example, the setting confirmation mode), and when the set value can be changed, the first setting (for example, speaker check) can be changed. When the setting value can be confirmed, the second setting (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, etc.) can be set. (Power saving mode setting) can be set, and the notification means is a means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the set value can be changed and the door body is open. (For example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28B), the display means does not display the display related to the first setting, and the first setting is not displayed. Is not possible, the set value can be changed, and the door body is closed (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28 (c)). ), The display means can display a display related to the first setting (for example, a setting screen including an operation check screen shown in FIG. 28 (c)), and the first setting can be set. In the state where the set value can be confirmed, the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30 (e) regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, in the setting confirmation mode). In some cases, or when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 31 (c), the display means displays the display related to the second setting (for example, the sound shown in FIG. 30 (e)). It is a game table characterized in that it is possible to display a setting screen) on which the amount can be set and the like, and the second setting can be set.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the setting change is an important work in which mistakes cannot be tolerated as compared with the setting confirmation, but when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, the first setting cannot be executed. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent setting mistakes in setting changes. In addition, when the door body is closed, the operation means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door body is closed when changing the settings. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as accidentally changing the settings at the time of the first setting. In addition, since the door body can be set in the open state or the closed state while the setting is being confirmed, there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which is convenient and work efficiency for the clerk of the game store. Can be enhanced.

The "first setting" and "second setting" according to the present invention are not limited to the illustrated settings, and the light intensity setting of the light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the history of past setting confirmation. (Date and time, set value at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), history such as the number of past big hits, etc. may be used.

Further, the first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With such a configuration, the first setting that can be set when changing the setting and the second setting that can be set when confirming the setting can be individually provided, which enhances the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the amusement store. be able to. In addition, at least a part of the first setting and at least a part of the second setting may be configured to be interchangeable. For example, among the first settings, the frequently used setting is the second. It may be possible to move to the setting.

Further, the notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, an effect button 192), the first setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operation means, and the second setting is the above. It is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is the notification means capable of executing the opening notification indicating that the door body is in the opened state when the door body is in the open state. A functional means, the operating means being a means capable of performing an action based on a certain movement pattern, the first setting of which is a check of the action of the operating means (eg, vibration or light emission). Check) is included, and when the door body is in the open state, the operation of the operating means may be invalid.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means is made to function as the notification means. Can be done.

Further, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button) capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means. The certain effect means is an effect means arranged at a position where the operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") can be performed from the front of the game table, and the operation is set in the first setting. It may include a check.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an operation check when changing a setting, which is more important than checking the setting, and when the door is open in the setting change, the first setting is executed. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, in the second setting, history information indicating the past history of the game console (for example, setting change history (history of setting values changed by setting change), error history (history of errors that have occurred in the past)) )) Confirmation and settings related to the power saving mode may be included.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be enhanced.

Further, the second setting may include a setting that is not initialized when the change of the setting value is executed (a setting that is not reset to the initial value).

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be enhanced.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game console provided with a setting means capable of setting a setting value of one of a plurality of setting values. Therefore, when the power is turned on while a certain operation by the setting key is performed, the setting value can be changed (for example, the setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting key is used. When the certain operation is performed, the set value can be confirmed (for example, the setting confirmation mode), and when the set value can be changed, the first setting (s) (s) For example, speaker check, accessory check, effect button check) can be set, and when the set value can be confirmed, the second setting (one or more) (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error) can be set. The history, time setting, power saving mode setting) can be set, and the first setting and the second setting are at least partially different settings.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set in the setting change and the second setting that can be set in the setting confirmation can be individually provided, and the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store or the like can be provided individually. It can enhance the sex.

Further, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button) capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern is provided, and the certain effect means is described from the front of the game table. It is an effect means arranged at a position where an operation check (hereinafter, referred to as “operation check”) is possible, and the first setting may include the operation check.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an operation check when changing a setting, which is more important than checking the setting, and when the door is open in the setting change, the first setting is executed. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the set value can be changed. When the door body is in the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28B), the display means displays the display related to the first setting. In the case where the first setting cannot be set without display, the set value can be changed, and the door body is closed (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28 (c)). When the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display the display related to the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the set value can be confirmed. Whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30 (e), or shown in FIG. 31 (c)). , When the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means can display the display related to the second setting, and may be able to set the second setting.

With such a configuration, setting change is an important task that cannot tolerate mistakes compared to setting confirmation, but when the door body is open in setting change, the first setting becomes infeasible. This makes it possible to prevent setting mistakes when changing settings. In addition, when the door body is closed, the operation means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door body is closed when changing the settings. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as accidentally changing the settings at the time of the first setting. In addition, since the door body can be set in the open state or the closed state while the setting is being confirmed, there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which is convenient and work efficiency for the clerk of the game store. Can be enhanced.

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, the notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, an effect button 192), and the first setting is the operation. The setting that can be executed by the operation by the means, the second setting is the setting that can be executed by the operation by the operation means, and the operation means is the door body when the door body is in the open state. Is a means that functions as the notification means capable of executing the opening notification indicating that the door is in the open state, and the operating means is a means that can execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and is the first means. The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking for vibration or light emission), even if the operation of the operating means is invalid when the door body is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means is made to function as the notification means. Can be done.

Further, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button) capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means. The certain effect means is an effect means arranged at a position where the operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") can be performed from the front of the game table, and the operation is set in the first setting. It may include a check.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an operation check when changing a setting, which is more important than checking the setting, and when the door is open in the setting change, the first setting is executed. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, the second setting includes confirmation of history information (for example, setting change history, error history) indicating the past history of the game console, and any of the settings related to the power saving mode. May be good.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be enhanced.

Further, the second setting may include a setting that is not initialized when the change of the set value is executed.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be enhanced.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) is a game console provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. Therefore, when the power is turned on while a certain operation by the setting key is performed, the setting value can be changed (for example, the setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting key is used. When the certain operation is performed, the set value can be confirmed (for example, the setting confirmation mode), and when the set value can be changed, the first setting (s) (s) For example, speaker check, accessory check, effect button check) can be set, and when the set value can be confirmed, the second setting (one or more) (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error) can be set. History, time setting, power saving mode setting) can be set, the first setting and the second setting are at least partially different settings, and the second setting is a power saving mode. It is a game console characterized by including at least the settings related to.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set in the setting change and the second setting that can be set in the setting confirmation can be individually provided, and the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store or the like can be provided individually. It can enhance the sex.

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the set value can be changed. When the door body is in the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28B), the display means displays the display related to the first setting. In the case where the first setting cannot be set without display, the set value can be changed, and the door body is closed (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28 (c)). When the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display the display related to the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the set value can be confirmed. Whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30 (e), or shown in FIG. 31 (c)). , When the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means can display the display related to the second setting, and may be able to set the second setting.

With such a configuration, setting change is an important task that cannot tolerate mistakes compared to setting confirmation, but when the door body is open in setting change, the first setting becomes infeasible. This makes it possible to prevent setting mistakes when changing settings. In addition, when the door body is closed, the operation means (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) inside the housing cannot be operated, so the first setting is executed only when the door body is closed when changing the settings. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as accidentally changing the settings at the time of the first setting. In addition, since the door body can be set in the open state or the closed state while the setting is being confirmed, there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which is convenient and work efficiency for the clerk of the game store. Can be enhanced.

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, the notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, an effect button 192), and the first setting is the operation. The setting that can be executed by the operation by the means, the second setting is the setting that can be executed by the operation by the operation means, and the operation means is the door body when the door body is in the open state. Is a means that functions as the notification means capable of executing the opening notification indicating that the door is in the open state, and the operating means is a means that can execute an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and is the first means. The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking for vibration or light emission), even if the operation of the operating means is invalid when the door body is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be executed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means is made to function as the notification means. Can be done.

Further, a certain effect means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), an effect button) capable of performing an operation based on a certain operation pattern is provided, and the effect means is a means including the operation means. The certain effect means is an effect means arranged at a position where the operation check (hereinafter referred to as "operation check") can be performed from the front of the game table, and the operation is set in the first setting. It may include a check.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an operation check when changing a setting, which is more important than checking the setting, and when the door is open in the setting change, the first setting is executed. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, the second setting may include a setting that is not initialized when the change of the set value is executed.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be enhanced.

<Movement of movable body>
Next, the operation of the movable body included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42.

FIG. 34 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the upper limit position (second position), and FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the lower limit position (first position). It is a front view which showed the state which moved to.

The movable body KT is a member that can move in the vertical direction in front of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. In this example, it is driven by a driving means (not shown) and vertically moves between the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 34 (a) and the lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 34 (b). It is configured to be movable to.

The "moving direction" of the movable body according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a member that can move in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction in front of the front door 102, or in the vertical direction. , Left-right direction, diagonal direction, or a combination of multiple or all directions may be combined.

<Movement of movable body / 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position>
Next, the first position, the second position, and the third position where the movable body KT can move will be described.

The lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 34 (b) is a position where the movable body KT is not exposed (protrudes) to the outside of the outer edge (lower end) of the front door 102 (door body), and is a slot machine. In the front view of 100, the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the lower end 102d of the front door 102 are substantially overlapped (overlapped).

At the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 34 (a), at least a part of the movable body KT (in this example, almost the entire movable body KT) is the outer edge (upper end) of the front door 102 (door body). This is a position where the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the upper end 102u of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap) in the front view of the slot machine 100.

The "first position" and "second position" of the movable body according to the present invention are not limited to this example, and for example, in the front view of the slot machine 100, the upper end of the movable body and the front door 102 The position where the upper ends substantially overlap (overlap) may be the first position, and the position where the upper ends of the movable body and the lower end of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap) may be the second position.

Further, for example, when the movable body is a member that can move in the left-right direction in front of the front door 102, the right end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 are substantially overlapped with each other in the front view of the slot machine 100. The position where the right end of the movable body and the left end of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap) may be the second position, or the left end of the movable body. The position where the left end of the front door 102 and the left end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) is the first position, and the position where the left end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) is the second position. There may be.

The third position is a position other than the above-mentioned first position and second position. For example, the position shown in FIG. 34 (e) (in this example, the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit). The position in the middle of the position (second position)) corresponds.

<Movement of movable body / First movement (first case)>
Next, the first operation (first case) of the movable body KT will be described.

FIGS. 34 (c) to 34 (f) show an example of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (first case). Is shown in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 34 (c) is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is closed. ..

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

The following state shown in FIG. 34 (d) is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification). , The opening notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state (in this example, the voice "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts the first operation when the power is turned on in the state where the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state). Further, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on, and the lower limit position (first position) in the state where the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state). There is a case where the movable body KT is located (first case), and in the first case, the movable body KT passes from the lower limit position (first position) to the third position as the first operation. And start the operation to return to the lower limit position (first position).

In the state shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is open, the first operation (first case). ), The movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 34 (d) to 34 (e). ) To the middle position (third position), and then as shown in the figure (e) to the figure (f), the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). The operation of lowering from the middle position (third position) to the lower limit position (first position) is performed.

According to this example, when the power is turned on in the state where the door body is open (first state), the movable body starts the first operation, so that the movable body is triggered by the opening of the door body. The operation can be confirmed reliably and easily, and the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

Further, since the first motion includes an motion of moving the movable body to the first position, the movable body normally performs the first motion depending on whether or not the movable body has moved to the first position. It is possible to reliably determine whether or not it has been executed.

Further, in the state where the door body is open (first state), there is a case where the movable body is located at the first position (first case), and in the first case, the movable body is the first. As the operation of, the operation of returning from the first position to the first position via the third position is started, so that the movable body is located in the first position even if the movable body is located in the first position. Can be confirmed to operate normally.

<Movement of movable body / Second movement>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT will be described.

34 (g) to 35 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the second operation of the movable body KT in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 34 (g) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the movable body KT that has completed the first operation is located at the lower limit position (first position).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts the second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state. This second motion is an motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start time of the second motion.

The mode of a certain operation is not particularly limited, but in a certain operation of this example, after moving the movable body KT from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), It is an operation of returning to the lower limit position (first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) again.

In the state shown in FIG. 34 (g), since the front door 102 (door body) has changed from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body KT is used as the second operation. As shown in FIGS. 34 (g) to 35 (a), after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (a). As shown in c), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in the figure (c) to the figure (d), the lower limit position (first position). The operation of moving from the position) to the upper limit position (second position) is performed.

According to this example, when the movable body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the second operation is started, so that the door body is closed as a trigger. , The operation of the movable body can be confirmed reliably and easily, and the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be enhanced.

Further, since the second motion includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the start of the second motion, it is necessary to confirm the common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. And the operation can be confirmed reliably.

<Movement of movable body / Second movement (second state. When the movable body is in the first position)>
Next, the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the first position) of the movable body KT will be described.

35 (e) to 36 (c) show that the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state (second state). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when the power is turned on in the state of being.

As described above, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is opened by performing a certain operation regarding the open / close sensor (detection means) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door 102 (door body). Even in this state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is configured to be a state of detecting the closing of the door body (opening detection state, second state).

Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

The state shown in FIG. 35 (e) is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is closed. ..

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

In the following state shown in FIG. 35 (f), a clerk of a game store opens the front door 102, forcibly sets the detection state of the open / close sensor to the closed detection state, and switches the power switch arranged inside the main body 101. It is in a state where the power is turned on by operating.

In the same state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state). Therefore, the upper lamp 142, The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the voice saying "the door is open") are not output.

When the power is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state), the movable body KT does not start the first operation, but first in the upper limit position (second position). It is configured to initiate a second operation, including an operation that moves to.

In the state shown in FIG. 35 (f), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state). As the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the first position), the movable body KT is shown in FIGS. 35 (f) to 35 (h). First, after raising to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. (H) to 36 (b), the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). ), And as shown in FIGS. (B) to (c), the operation of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) is performed.

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed even when the door body is closed, and the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like can be enhanced.

<Movement of movable body / First movement (second case)>
Next, the first operation (second case) of the movable body KT will be described.

36 (d) to 37 (f) show an example of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power is turned on (second case). Is shown in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 36D is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is positioned at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is closed. However, it is located at an intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

In the following state shown in FIG. 36 (e), a clerk of a game store opens the front door 102 and turns on the power with a setting change (the operation of turning the setting key provided inside the main body 101 from off to on) is performed. It is in a state where the power is turned on).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode (the setting value can be changed), the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red, and the front door 102 is in the open state. A setting change notification sound (in this example) is output after an opening notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277 as well as a notification indicating that the door is open. Then, the voice "The setting is being changed") is repeatedly output.

In the slot machine 100, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on, and the lower limit position (first state) in the state where the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state). There is a case where the movable body KT is located at a certain position (second case) different from the position (position of), and in the second case, the movable body KT moves from a certain position to the upper limit position (as the first operation). The operation of moving to the lower limit position (first position) via the second position) is started.

In the state shown in FIG. 36 (e), when the power is turned on, the movable body KT is located at a certain position different from the lower limit position (first position), so that the first operation (second operation) is performed. In the case of), the movable body KT is raised from a certain position to the upper limit position (second position) and then lowered to the lower limit position (first position) as shown in FIG. I do.

In this example, the power-on accompanied by the setting change has been described, but the first movable body KT in the case where the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before the power-on is performed (second case). The operation of is the same even when the power is turned on without changing the setting.

According to this example, in the state where the door body is open (first state), the movable body may be located at a certain position different from the first position (second case), and the second In the case of, since the movable body starts the movement from a certain position to the first position via the second position as the first movement, the first movement with the first case The difference makes it possible to grasp the position of the movable body when the power is turned on.

The state shown in FIG. 36 (g) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is terminated.

In the same state, since the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) has ended, the setting change completion notification sound (in this example, the voice "setting change completed") is output from the speakers 272 and 277. At the same time, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to give a notification (open notification) indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state.

The state shown in FIG. 37A is a state in which the front door 102 is closed while the movable body KT that has completed the first operation is located at the lower limit position (first position).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts the second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state. This second motion is an motion including a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start time of the second motion.

In a certain operation of this example, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), then returned to the lower limit position (first position), and then again. , It is an operation to move from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

In the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), since the front door 102 (door body) has changed from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body KT is used as the second operation. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), the same figure (c) to the same figure ( As shown in e), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in the figure (e) to the figure (f), the lower limit position (first position). The operation of moving from the position) to the upper limit position (second position) is performed.

According to this example, when the movable body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the second operation is started, so that the door body is closed as a trigger. , The operation of the movable body can be confirmed reliably and easily, and the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be enhanced.

Further, since the second motion includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the start of the second motion, it is necessary to confirm the common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. And the operation can be confirmed reliably.

<Movement of movable body / Second movement (second state. When the movable body is in the third position)>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT (second state, when the movable body is in the third position) will be described.

38 (a) to 38 (f) show a lower limit position (first position) and an upper limit position (first position) of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state (second state). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when the power is turned on in the state which is located in the position (third position) other than the second position).

The state shown in FIG. 38A is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, in the state where the front door 102 is closed, the movable body KT is in the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (first position). It is located at a position (third position) other than the second position).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

In the following state shown in FIG. 38 (b), a clerk of a game store opens the front door 102, forcibly sets the detection state of the open / close sensor to the closed detection state, and switches the power switch arranged inside the main body 101. It is in a state where the power is turned on by operating.

In the same state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state). Therefore, the upper lamp 142, The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the voice saying "the door is open") are not output.

When the power is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state), the movable body KT does not start the first operation, but first in the upper limit position (second position). It is configured to initiate a second operation, including an operation that moves to.

The state shown in FIG. 38 (b) is a state in which the power is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state), so that the second operation (second state) is performed. ), As shown in FIGS. 38 (b) to 38 (c), the movable body KT is first raised to the upper limit position (second position), and then the same figure (c) to the same figure (e). ), The lower limit position (first position) is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIGS. (E) to (f). ) To the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed even when the door body is closed, and the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like can be enhanced.

<Movement of movable body / Second movement (second state. When the movable body is in the second position)>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT (second state, when the movable body is in the second position) will be described.

In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (e), the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) when the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state (second state). It is a figure which showed an example of the operation of the movable body KT in the time series when the power is turned on in the state of being.

The state shown in FIG. 39A is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) when the front door 102 is closed. ..

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

The following state shown in FIG. 39B is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, the front door 102 is open, but the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state). Therefore, the upper lamp 142, The opening notification by the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, the voice saying "the door is open") are not output.

When the movable body is positioned at the second position in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state), the movable body KT is subjected to the second operation from the second position. It is configured to initiate the operation of returning to the second position via the first position.

In the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is positioned at the upper limit position (second position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is open detection state). As the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the second position), the movable body KT is shown in FIGS. 39 (b) to 39 (d). In addition, it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in FIGS. Perform the operation of moving to (second position).

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed even when the door body is closed, and the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like can be enhanced.

<Movement of movable body / Door opening during normal game>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the normal game will be described.

40 (a) to 40 (g) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT during a normal game in chronological order.

The movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) in the normal gaming state (certain state), but the door body is open (first) in the normal gaming state (certain state). When the state is changed from the closed state to the closed state, the operation of moving from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position) is started.

The state shown in FIG. 40 (a) is a state in which the movable body effect is performed using the movable body KT in the normal game state (the front door 102 is closed), and in this example, the movable body effect in the normal game state is performed. Inside, the movable body KT is configured to move to the upper limit position (second position).

Since the same state is a normal gaming state, in addition to the movable body effect by the movable body KT, the effect by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, the output of the effect sound by the speakers 272, 277, and the like are performed.

The following state shown in FIG. 40 (b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by a clerk of a game store or the like in the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), and the normal game state is interrupted.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification). , Speakers 272, 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "the door is open").

Further, since the front door 102 is opened in the normal gaming state, the movable body KT is moved from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (d). Perform the operation of lowering to the first position).

According to this example, when the movable body is located at the second position (the position exposed to the outside of the outer edge of the door body) and the door body is opened, the first position (the outer edge of the door body) is opened. Since the movement is performed to the position where it is not exposed to the outside, it is possible to prevent the situation where the clerk of the game store or the player touches the movable body and injures it, and ensures safety. Can be done.

FIG. 40 (e) shows a state in which the opened front door 102 is closed and the normal gaming state is restored again.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated, while the normal gaming state is restored. Therefore, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are used to produce the effect, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to output the effect sound.

The following state shown in FIG. 40 (f) is a state in which the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated in the normal gaming state.

In this example, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (as shown in FIGS. 40 (f) to (g)) by operating the effect button 192 or the start lever 135. After raising to the second position), the movable body production by the movable body KT is restarted.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to a second position (for example, a position where a normal effect is performed) without closing the door body, which saves the trouble of a clerk of a game store and the like. Convenience can be enhanced.

<Movement of movable body / Door closure during operation>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT will be described.

41 (a) to 42 (a) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT.

The state shown in FIG. 41A is a state before the power is turned on. In this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is closed. ..

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, blinking red) and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (for example,). The voice "The door is open") is not output.

The following state shown in FIG. 41 (b) is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification). , The opening notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state (in this example, the voice "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, in the same state, since the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is open, FIGS. 34 (d) to 34 (f) are used. As described above, as the first operation (first case), the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). After raising to the middle position (third position) of, from the middle position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), the lower limit position (first position) In this example, the front door 102 is closed during the ascending operation.

The state shown in FIG. 41 (d) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed during the ascending operation of the movable body KT.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification sound by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

Further, the movable body KT of the slot machine 100 is in the middle of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) (during climbing), or from the upper limit position (second position). When the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state while moving to the lower limit position (first position) (descent), the first position is reached. It is configured to start the second operation.

In the state shown in FIG. 41 (d), the front door 102 (door body) is open (the first position) while moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position). Since the state changed from the one state) to the closed state (second state), as the second operation, the movable body KT was moved to the upper limit as shown in FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (f). After raising to the position (second position), as shown in FIGS. (F) to (h), lower the position from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). As shown in FIGS. (H) to 42 (a), the operation of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) is performed.

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed even while the movable body is in operation, and the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like can be enhanced.

In this example, the operation of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed during the ascending operation of the movable body KT has been described, but the operation of the movable body KT is described during the descending operation of the movable body KT (for example, the upper limit position (second). The operation of the movable body KT is the same when the front door 102 is closed (while moving from the position) to the lower limit position (first position).

<Movement / deformation example of movable body>
Next, a modified example of the operation of the movable body KT will be described. 42 (b) to 42 (f) are diagrams showing modified examples of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on in the state where the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state), the movable body KT starts the first operation, and the front door is started from the first state. An example of starting the second operation when the 102 (door body) changes to the closed state is shown. For example, in the setting screen described with reference to FIG. 28 or the like, the item of "movable body storage selection" is displayed. The first operation or the second operation is started when the clerk of the amusement shop or the like operates the effect button 192 (operation means) and selects the item of "movable body storage selection". It may be configured as.

The state shown in FIG. 42B is a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the item of the movable body storage selection on the setting screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In this example, the movable body KT is in the upper limit position. It is located at (second position).

In the same state, since the item of "Movable body storage selection" is selected on the setting screen, a display prompting the operation for starting the operation of the movable body KT (in this example, "Temporarily move the movable body by operating the effect button". Display of the character string "Can be stored") has started.

The following state shown in FIG. 42 (c) is a state in which a display prompting an operation for starting the operation of the movable body KT (display of a character string "The movable body can be temporarily stored by operating the effect button") is performed. Since the operation of the effect button 192 was accepted, the movable body KT was lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and the movable body KT was moved from the outer edge of the front door 102. Is in a state where it is stored in a position where it is not exposed to the outside.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the first position (for example, a position not exposed to the outer edge of the door body) without closing the door body, which is troublesome for a clerk of a game store or the like. Can be omitted and convenience can be improved.

Further, when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body may be configured to move to the second position triggered by the operation of a certain operating means.

In the state shown in FIG. 42 (d), the effect button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated while the movable body is located at the lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 42 (c). It is in a state of being.

In this example, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (as shown in FIGS. 42 (d) to 42 (e)) by operating the effect button 192 or the start lever 135. After raising it to the second position), the production by the movable body KT is started.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to a second position (for example, a position where a normal effect is performed) without closing the door body, which saves the trouble of a clerk of a game store and the like. Convenience can be enhanced.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes a movable body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 34) and a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 34). For example, it is a game table provided with a front door 102) shown in FIG. 1, and the movable body is in a state in which the door body is open (hereinafter, referred to as a “first state”, for example, FIG. 34. When the power is turned on in the state shown in (d), at least the first operation (for example, from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (as shown in FIGS. 34 (d) to (e)) After raising to a position (third position) between the upper limit position (second position) and the upper limit position (first position), the lower limit position (third position) is shown in the figure (e) to the figure (f). The operation of lowering from the intermediate position (third position) between the upper limit position (second position) and the lower limit position (first position)) is started, and the movable body is the first position. When the door body changes from the state of 1 to the state in which the door body is closed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 34 (g)), at least the second operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (g) to 35 (a)). After raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), from the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c). Operation of lowering to the lower limit position (first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. (C) to (d). It is a game table characterized by starting.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the movable body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state), the movable body performs the second operation. Since the start is started, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed reliably and easily with the closing of the door body as an opportunity, and the convenience of the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be enhanced.

Further, when the power is turned on in the first state, the first operation and an operation different from the first operation may be started, or the first state is changed to the second state. Then, the second operation and an operation different from the second operation may be started.

Further, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body when the power is turned on, and in the first operation, the movable body is placed in the first position (for example, the lower limit position shown in FIG. 34 (b)). ) May be included in the operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the movable body has normally performed the first operation, depending on whether or not the movable body has moved to the first position. The first operation may be a preliminary operation of the second operation.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and in the first case, when the power is turned on, the said The movable body is the first position via the first position to the third position (for example, the position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position shown in FIG. 34 (e)) as the first operation. It may be the one that starts the operation of returning to.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the movable body operates normally even when the movable body is located at the first position.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is positioned at a certain position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), and in the second case. When the power is turned on, the movable body moves from the certain position to the first position via the second position (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 34 (a)) as the first operation. It may be the one that starts the operation.

With such a configuration, the position of the movable body at the time of turning on the power can be grasped by the difference in the first operation from the first case.

Further, the second operation is a lower limit as shown in FIGS. 34 (g) to 35 (a) regardless of the position of the movable body at the start of the second operation. After raising from the position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position ( Operation including lowering to the first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. (C) to (d). It may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm a common operation regardless of the position of the movable body, and it is possible to reliably confirm the operation.

Further, a detection means (for example, an open / close sensor) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body is provided, and the power can be turned on and off in the case of the first state, and there is a certain detection means. By performing an operation (for example, an operation of inserting a light-shielding piece of a certain length between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with a tape or the like), in the first state. Even if there is, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be a state of detecting the closing of the door body (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), and when the power is turned on in the second state. The movable body may start the second operation including the operation of first moving to the second position without starting the first operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is closed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like.

The first position is a position where the movable body is not exposed to the outside of the outer edge of the door body (for example, the lower limit position shown in FIG. 34 (b)), and the second position is the above. At least a part of the movable body may be exposed to the outside of the outer edge of the door body (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 34A).

With such a configuration, by moving the movable body to the first position, the movable body can be prevented from being exposed to the outside of the outer edge of the door body, and the safety of the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be improved. Can be secured.

Further, in the third state, when the movable body is positioned at the second position, as the second operation, the second operation is performed from the second position via the first position. It may be configured to start the operation of returning to the position.

Further, in a certain state (for example, a normal gaming state), the movable body is located at the second position, but in the certain state, the door body is closed from the open state (first state). The movable body may be configured to start the operation of moving from the second position to the first position when the state is changed to the state (second state).

Further, in the movable body, the door body is moving from the first position to the second position, or from the second position to the first position. When the state changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state), the second operation may be started.

<Error notification>
Next, the error notification that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be described.

Here, as errors that may occur in the slot machine 100, door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion error 1 to 4, medal payout error 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, etc. Examples include abnormal winning.

The door opening error (door open error) is an error for notifying the opening of the door of the game table, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed.

The hopper empty error is a payout error related to medal payout, and when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 is less than the specified number (for example, the medal payout sensor remains off for 3000 ms or more). It occurs when (if it does not change) and is resolved by replenishing the hopper with more medals than the specified number. The hopper error occurs when a connection abnormality such as a disconnection is detected in the cable (wiring) connected to the hopper, and the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the connection abnormality of the hopper cable is resolved. If the second condition is satisfied later (in this example, when the reset button is operated or the door is reset), the problem is resolved.

Medal insertion error 1 (medal insertion jam) occurs when the inserted medals stay (for example, when the input state of the medal detection sensor does not change for 150 ms or more), and after removing the cause of the error, the error is cleared. Resolves when a switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number, and is resolved by changing the setting or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal insertion processing, and the medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals are inserted into the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. (For example, when the medal detection sensor and proximity sensor detect an abnormal pattern), and after removing the cause of the error, the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation Will be resolved when the is accepted.

Medal payout abnormality 1 (medal payout jam) occurs when there is no medal payout for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (for example, when the medal detection sensor changes from on to off and then continues to be on for 200 ms or more). Occurrence, medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals stay while driving the medal payout device, and medal payout abnormality 3 (illegal payout) occurs in either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 except during the medal payout process. Occurs when is turned on, and all of them are resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after removing the cause of the error. RAM failure (RWM abnormality) occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM or when the number of medals inserted at the time of receiving the start lever 135 is abnormal, and the error release switch, reset button, or It will be resolved when the door reset operation is accepted or by changing the setting.

The winning error (winning symbol abnormality) is when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (in the display determination of the symbol combination, the condition device is not operating on the valid line). It occurs when a prize, operation, or replay is displayed), and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted, or by changing the setting. A backup error occurs when the backup data is abnormal or the RAM (RWM) checksum value is abnormal when the power is turned on, and the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. Or, it can be solved by changing the setting.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine include, for example, a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

<Error notification / main board display, etc.>
Next, prior to the explanation of the error notification, a member (main board display, etc.) arranged inside the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front.

Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Below, three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. Further, a main board display (main board 7-segment) 190 composed of a 7-segment display is arranged on the main control board. The main board display 190 will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (b), but the main board display 190 is one of the notification means capable of notifying information about the game (error, operation state of the operation means, etc.). Is.

A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is disposed on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side facing the main control board storage case 210. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the sub control unit 400, and 500, which will be described later, and each device. do. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected to the power cord 264 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the staging device 160 and a staging control board for controlling the staging device 160 (on the upper part of the design display window 113). (Not shown), an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Error notification / notification means (display means)>
Next, the notification means included in the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (a). FIG. 44A is a schematic view (front view) of a main part showing the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 by extracting it.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means capable of displaying as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, a payout number display device 127, a stored number display device 125, a game information display 126, and FIG. 43 described with reference to FIG. The main board display 190 and the like described with reference to the above are mentioned, and in this example, these display means are composed of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display and the like.

FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a display example by the main board display 190. In this example, the main board display 190 is composed of a 7-segment display, and by lighting one, a plurality, or all of the seven segments a to g, predetermined game information is notified. It is possible.

The main board display 190 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and other display means such as LEDs may be applied. Needless to say, the game information that can be notified is not limited to seven types.

In this example, the segment a of the main board display 190 is lit during the operation of the reset button, and the segments b, c, and d are the stop button 137 (left stop button) and the stop button 138 (middle reel stop button, respectively). ), Stop button 139 (right reel stop button) is lit when operated. Further, the segment e is lit while the front door 102 is open, the segment f is lit when a hopper error occurs, and the segment g has an error requiring RAM clear (for example, the above-mentioned medal insertion error 2). Lights up when it occurs.

The mode of notification by each of the segments a to g is not limited to the lighting of the segment, and the notification of each state may be performed by blinking or turning off the segment. Further, the main board display 190 may be any as long as it can notify information about the game, and may be an error other than the illustrated error (for example, RAM failure) or information other than the illustrated operation information (for example, the game state, winning a prize). The combination, the winning combination) may be notified.

<Various notification / notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 2.

<Various notification / notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notifying means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, an effect button 192, a stop button 137 to 139, and a start lever described with reference to FIG. Examples thereof include 135 and the like, and in this example, any of the light emitting means is composed of an LED.

The effect button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, and examples of the light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine include a frame lamp, an effect button, and an accessory.

<Error notification of door opening error>
Next, error notification when a door opening error occurs will be described. 44 (c) to 45 (a) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a door opening error occurs.

The state shown in FIG. 44 (c) is a state before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 44D is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to blink the front door. Notifying that the 102 is in the open state (opening notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door opening error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is notified. Then, the open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The state shown in FIG. 44 (e) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

In the same state, since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are turned on, and the normal screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 is displayed. Since the open state continues, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the opening notification (blinking red) by the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 ("the door is open"). The output of the voice) and the door opening error notification (the red lighting of the segment e) by the main board display 19 are continued.

The state shown in FIG. 45A is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like closes the front door 102.

In the same state, since the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (“door”). Is open ”) and the door opening error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the main board display 19 is terminated, while the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are lit. While the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 is continued, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are turned on in the effect mode.

<Error notification of hopper error>
Next, error notification when a hopper error occurs will be described.

45 (b) to 46 (f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 45 (b) to 45 (c) are almost the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 44 (c) to 44 (d), the description thereof will be omitted, but in this example, the description will be omitted. The state shown in FIG. 45B is different in that a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

Here, a hopper error (certain error) occurs when a cable connection abnormality occurs due to a disconnection of the cable connected to the hopper, and the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the hopper cable). This error is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the reset button is operated) after the connection error is resolved.

<Error notification of hopper error / Start second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 45D is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start at least the first notification and the second notification when a hopper error (certain error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, an error code (“E4” in this example) is input using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , Performs hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred (in this example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 is turned on.

In the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the opening notification (blinking in red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277. (Voice saying "Door is open") and door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (lighting of red in segment e) are continued.

<Error notification of hopper error / resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 45 (e) is a state in which the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

The slot machine 100 performs a first notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and a second notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When one condition is satisfied (in this example, when the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the first notification is continued. It is configured to end the second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is terminated.

According to this example, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that it is possible to notify that the error is not completely resolved. Since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the amusement store.

In the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the opening notification (blinking in red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277. (Voice saying "Door is open") and door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (lighting of red in segment e) are continued.

<Error notification / reset button operation of hopper error → End the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 45 (f) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation) in order to eliminate the hopper error (certain error).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was satisfied), the segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. As a result, the reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved by the operation of the reset button, so that the first notification (first notification) The hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is terminated.

According to this example, when an operation by a certain operation means (reset button operation) is performed, a certain error (hopper error) is eliminated and a third is arranged inside the housing of the game table. Since the notification means (segment a of the main board display 190) performs the third notification (reset button operation notification by the segment a of the main board display 190), a certain error has been resolved inside the housing. It is possible to notify the person in an easy-to-understand manner on the side, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the amusement shop.

The "second condition" according to the present invention may be a condition that is satisfied at least when an operation is performed by a certain operating means, and is an operation other than the operation of the reset button, for example, inside the main body 101. The operation may be performed by an operating means such as an arranged setting switch, setting key, RAM clear button, or may be an operation such as a door reset described later.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the opening notification (blinking in red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277. (Voice saying "Door is open") and door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (lighting of red in segment e) are continued.

<Error notification of hopper error / elimination of hopper error → closing of front door>
The state shown in FIG. 46A is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like closes the front door 102 after the hopper error is resolved.

In the same state, since the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (“door”). Is open ”) and the door opening error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the main board display 19 is terminated, while the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are lit. While the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 is continued, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are turned on in the effect mode.

<Error notification of hopper error / second hopper error → power on>
In the state shown in FIG. 46 (b), in a state where the second hopper error has occurred, a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to supply power. Is in the state of being put in.

Since the same state is almost the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 45 (c), the description thereof will be omitted, but the state shown in FIG. 46 (b) of this example has been once resolved before the power is turned on. The difference is that the hopper error (a certain error) is occurring again.

The state shown in FIG. 46 (c) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start at least the first notification and the second notification when a hopper error (certain error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, an error code (“E4” in this example) is input using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , Performs hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred (in this example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 is turned on.

When a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs, the slot machine 100 starts voice notification regarding the error, and until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the reset button is operated). Continue voice notification. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred and the door body (front door 102 in this example) is in the open state, the door body is in the open state. A notification sound indicating that there is a certain condition (first notification sound, in this example, an open notification sound) is output, and after the certain error is resolved, if the certain error occurs again, there is a certain condition. It is configured to output a notification sound (second notification sound; in this example, a hopper error notification sound) prompting the resolution of the certain error in connection with the occurrence of the error.

In the same state, after the hopper error (certain error) is resolved, the certain error occurs again, so that the speaker 272, 277 gives an opening notification sound indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state (opening notification sound). Instead of the first notification sound (the sound that the door is open), the hopper error notification sound (the second notification sound. In this example, it is a hopper error. Call the staff) to prompt the resolution of the hopper error. By outputting the voice) "Please", the voice notification regarding the hopper error is performed.

According to this example, a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state (first notification sound) and a notification sound prompting the resolution of a certain error (second notification sound) are made according to the situation of the game console. Sound) can be used properly, and convenience can be improved.

Further, the power is turned on when a certain error has occurred, and when the door body is in the open state, the first notification sound is output, and after the certain error is resolved, the other When an error occurs, the second notification sound is output, so when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be output with priority, and the door body is prioritized to be in the open state. Can be notified.

In the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the door opening by the main board display 19 are performed. Continue error notification (lighting red in segment e).

Further, the hopper error notification sound for prompting the resolution of the hopper error is not limited to the notification sound including the voice that can specify the type of error (in this example, "hopper error"), and for example, the type of error cannot be specified. A notification sound (for example, a voice saying "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") that includes a voice that can identify the type of error after outputting a various notification sound (for example, a voice saying "Call a staff member"). May be output.

<Error notification of hopper error / resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 46D is a state in which the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

The slot machine 100 performs a first notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and a second notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When one condition is satisfied (in this example, when the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the first notification is continued. It is configured to end the second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is terminated.

Further, in the same state, since the second hopper error (certain error) continues, the hopper error notification sound (second notification) prompting the resolution of the hopper error (certain error) by the speakers 272 and 277. Sound. Since the output of "Hopper error. Please call the staff") is continued and the front door 102 is still open, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and effect button 192 are used. The opening notification (blinking in red) and the door opening error notification (lighting in red in segment e) by the main board display 19 are continued.

The state shown in FIG. 46 (e) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is satisfied) in order to eliminate the hopper error (certain error), and the state shown in FIG. 46 (f). Is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by a clerk of a game store or the like after the hopper error is resolved, which is the same as the state described with reference to FIGS. 45 (f) and 46 (a), respectively. The description is omitted.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment has a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and a notification means (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). For example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop button 137 to 139, start lever 135. Etc.), wherein the notification means is a means capable of executing notification regarding at least a certain error, and the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277). The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (hereinafter, referred to as "first notification sound"; for example, a voice saying "the door is open"). Yes, the sound output means is a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "second notification sound") for prompting the resolution of the certain error in connection with the occurrence of the certain error, for example, "a hopper error. It is a means capable of outputting a voice) saying "Please call me"), and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second notification sound in a state where the certain error has occurred. It is a game table characterized in that it is a means that may output a notification sound.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in the open state and a notification sound prompting the resolution of a certain error are made according to the situation of the game table or the like. (Second notification sound) can be used properly, and convenience can be improved.

Further, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the display means indicates that the certain error has occurred in a state where the certain error has occurred (for example, "hopper". It may be possible to start the display of the character string "This is an error. Please call the staff."

Further, when the door body is closed in the state where the certain error has occurred, the sound output means outputs the second notification sound without outputting the first notification sound. However, when the door body is in the open state in the state where the certain error has occurred, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second notification sound. It may be a means that may output.

With such a configuration, when the door body is in the open state, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in the open state and a certain error can be eliminated depending on the situation. The urging notification sound (second notification sound) can be used properly, and convenience can be enhanced.

Further, when the sound output means is turned off in a state where the certain error has occurred and the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, the door body is in the open state. However, it may be a means for outputting the first notification sound, and when the certain error occurs again after the certain error is resolved, the second notification sound is output. ..

With such a configuration, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be preferentially output, and the door body in the open state can be preferentially notified.

In addition, it is equipped with a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and when the power is turned on while a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key. Is in a state where the set value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where the certain error has occurred, and the power is turned on in the state where the certain operation is performed. When the certain error is not resolved and the door body is in the open state, the change of the set value is prioritized over the certain error, and the sound output means is the setting. The first notification sound is output without outputting the notification sound indicating that the value can be changed, and after the change of the set value is completed, the second notification is used as notification of the certain error. It may output sound.

With such a configuration, since the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, the setting change can be surely finished and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. Further, since the first notification sound is output after the setting change is completed, it is possible to surely deal with the error after the setting change is completed.

Further, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in the state where the certain error has occurred and the door body is in the open state, the set value is higher than the certain error. While giving priority to confirmation, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound without outputting a notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed, and confirmation of the set value is completed. Later, the second notification sound may be output as notification of the certain error.

Further, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in the state where the certain error has occurred and the door body is in the closed state, the first notification sound is not output. A second notification sound is output, and the sound output means performs the certain operation after the power is turned on in the state where the certain error has occurred, and the door body is in the open state. May output the first notification sound and may output the second notification sound.

Further, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed in the state where the certain error occurs, and the door body is in the open state. In that case, the change of the set value is prioritized over the certain error, and the display means displays the setting being changed (for example, "setting is being changed") indicating that the set value can be changed. It is possible to start the display including the display of the character string (for example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call the staff") indicating that the above-mentioned error has occurred. It may be a thing.

Further, when the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means always starts the output of the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game store that the door body is in the open state.

<Error notification of hopper error / resolution by door reset>
Next, the solution of the hopper error by door reset will be described.

47 (a) to 47 (f) are diagrams showing an example of solving the hopper error by door reset in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (d) are the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 45 (b) to (e), the description thereof is omitted and FIG. 47 ( e) The following drawings will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 47 (e) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in order to eliminate the hopper error (certain error) by the door reset.

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) continues in the state where the front door 102 is closed, the output of the opening notification sound (voice saying "the door is open") by the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. On the other hand, by outputting a hopper error notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") that prompts the resolution of the hopper error (certain error), a voice notification regarding the hopper error is output. Is going.

The state shown in FIG. 47 (f) is a state in which the door is reset (the second condition is satisfied by the second operation).

Here, the door reset is an operation of inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 into the door key hole 140 described with reference to FIG. 1 and rotating the slot machine 100 in a predetermined direction. Then, in addition to the above-mentioned operation by the reset button (first operation), it is possible to eliminate the hopper error by the door reset (second operation).

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) is resolved by the door reset, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is terminated.

According to this example, a second operation (door reset) that can be performed with the door body (front door 102) closed is performed, and the second operation is arranged on the front side of the game table. Since the first notification by one notification means (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is completed, it is confirmed that a certain error has been resolved in front of the amusement store even when the door body is closed. It is possible to notify the user in an easy-to-understand manner on the side, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is the number of payouts shown in the first notification means (for example, FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e)). A game table including a display 127) and a second notification means (for example, a segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45 (d)), wherein the first notification means is In at least a part of the period during which an error (for example, a hopper error) occurs (or all the periods during which an error occurs), the first notification (for example, the payout number indicator) It is a means capable of initiating the hopper error notification by 127), and the second notification means is at least a part of the period in which the certain error is occurring (or the certain error is occurring). It is a means capable of initiating a second notification (eg, a hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) during the entire period), wherein the certain error satisfies the first condition. With an error that is resolved if the second condition is met (eg, the reset button is operated or the door is reset) after (eg, the hopper error connection error has been resolved). Yes, when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is subsequently satisfied, the first notification is continued, while the first notification is continued. It is a game table characterized by ending the second notification.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is the first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e)). A game table including a second notifying means (for example, a segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45D), and the first notifying means is an error (for example, an error). , Hopper error) in at least a part of the period (or all the periods in which a certain error occurs), the first notification (for example, the hopper error by the payout number indicator 127). The second notifying means is a means capable of initiating (notification), and the second notifying means is at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or all of the period during which the certain error occurs). In the period), it is a means capable of initiating a second notification (eg, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190), wherein the certain error satisfies the first condition (eg, hopper). The error is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the reset button is operated or the door is reset) after the error connection error is resolved. When an error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and when the first condition is satisfied thereafter, the first notification is continued while the second notification is performed. The game table is characterized in that the notification is terminated and the certain error is an error relating to the addition of game value (for example, payout of a game medium, addition of points at which a game can be executed).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that the notification that the error is not completely eliminated is notified. In addition, since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the amusement store. ..

Further, a third notification means (for example, the segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45 (f)) and a certain operation means (for example, a reset button) are provided, and the second notification means is provided. The third notification means is arranged inside the housing of the game table, and the second condition is at least an operation by the certain operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation", for example, a reset button. The condition is satisfied when the operation) is performed, and the third notification means is based on the third notification (for example, segment a of the main board display 190) when the first operation is performed. It may be a means that can start (reset button operation notification).

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the inside of the housing that a certain error has been resolved in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like. Further, the third notification may be executed in a state where the second notification is not executed.

Further, a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, the first notification means is arranged on the front side of the game table, and the second condition is the first condition. It is a condition that is also satisfied by performing a second operation (for example, door reset) different from the operation, and the second operation is an operation that can be performed with the door body closed, and the first operation. The first notification may be terminated in connection with the execution of the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that a certain error has been resolved on the front side of the game store even when the door body is closed, and the work of the store clerk or the like can be performed. Efficiency and convenience can be improved.

Further, the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means starts error display when the certain error occurs, and the first condition and the second condition are described. May be a means of displaying the error display until is satisfied (for example, until the reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that a certain error has been resolved by a display means, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like.

Further, the sound output means (for example, the speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) is provided, and the sound output means starts voice notification regarding the certain error when the certain error occurs, and the first one. It may be a means for continuing the voice notification until the condition and the second condition are satisfied (for example, until the reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that a certain error has been resolved by a sound output means, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of a clerk of a game store or the like.

Further, in order to satisfy the first condition and the second condition, an operation that can be performed with the door body opened (for example, an operation means (setting key, setting-switch) installed inside the main body 101). , Reset button, etc.) may be required. Further, the first notification means, the second notification means, or the third notification means may be a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the first notification means, or the third notification means. The second notification means may be arranged on the front side of the game table, or may be arranged inside the housing of the game table.

Further, the first condition or the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when an operation by a certain operating means is performed, a condition that is satisfied when a transition to a certain gaming state is performed, and a reset operation is performed. It may be a condition that is satisfied in the case, a condition that is satisfied in the case of power failure / recovery, and the like. Further, the reset button may also be used as a setting switch (a switch for changing the setting). Further, the first notification or the second notification is not limited to the case where a certain error occurs when the power is turned on, and may be the case where a certain error occurs in the normal gaming state. Further, the certain error may be an error related to energization (hopper error), an error related to medals (medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, etc.).

<Error notification / setting change mode for hopper error>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when the setting change mode is entered will be described.

FIGS. 48 (a) to 49 (e) are diagrams showing an example of error notification of a hopper error in time series when the setting change mode is entered.

<Power on with hopper error notification / setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 48A is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 48B is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power while the operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to blink the front door. Notifying that the 102 is in the open state (opening notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door opening error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is notified. Then, the open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Shift to error notification / setting change mode for hopper error>
The state shown in FIG. 48 (c) is a state in which the setting change mode is entered in the state where the hopper error (certain error) has occurred.

The slot machine 100 is turned on when a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key (or after the power is turned on and before a predetermined time elapses (the control unit sets the setting key). If the setting key is turned on from off before checking the on / off status of (in this example), the setting value shifts to the changeable state (setting change mode), and a certain error (in this example, the hopper) Even if an error) occurs, the state in which the set value can be changed is maintained, and the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127) is performed after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. The hopper error notification by the hopper error notification) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) are configured to be started.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) even when the hopper error (certain error) occurs. Since the state) is maintained (setting change is prioritized over notification of a certain error), the setting changing display indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting changing"". The display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in the first display mode (in this example, the display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image). Display on.

According to this example, since the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, the setting change can be surely finished and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to surely deal with the error after the setting change is completed.

Further, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that it is possible to notify that the error is not completely resolved and the second notification is made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be changed and the door body is open (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed is output. Instead of starting, the output of the notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state is started.

Since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the state shown in FIG. 48 (c) is a setting change notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed (in this example, " The speaker 272,277 emits an open notification sound (in this example, the voice "The door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state without starting the output of the voice "The setting is being changed"). Output from.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating that the door is open can be made conspicuous. The clerk of the amusement shop can surely know that the door is open.

In addition, when the door is opened while the setting is being changed, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the setting is being changed. Can be grasped.

<Error notification / setting change mode for hopper error (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 48D is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) even when the hopper error (certain error) occurs. Since the state) is maintained (setting change has priority over notification of a certain error), the setting changing display indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting changing"". The display including the display of the character string "" is placed in the second display mode (in this example, the character string "setting is being changed" is placed in the upper left of the green background image, and the operation check can be started on the setting screen (in this example). It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the display mode) including the operation check setting screen).

Also, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed". The voice) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described with reference to FIGS. 48 (c) and 48 (d), according to this example, in the door open state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, since the notification sound during the setting change is output, the state of the door opening and the door closing can be linked with the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting change, providing a game table with a characteristic notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open while the setting is being changed (the setting may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be surely notified that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the setting change mode of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which the operation check can be started. By operating the cross key 193 (operation means), a clerk of a game store or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, the accessory check, and the effect button check on the setting screen. Needless to say, the items that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example.

<Error notification / setting change mode for hopper error (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 48 (e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed"). The opening notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the voice), and the upper part is output. The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

The effect button 192 is a means that functions as an operating means in various settings and the like, and is a means that functions as a notifying means capable of giving a notification. However, when the effect button 192 functions as a notifying means for performing an open notification, the operating means The operation as is invalid.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is the first. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image).

<Error notification of hopper error / setting change mode (door open) / setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 48 (f) is a state in which the set value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 49 (a) is a state in which the set value is fixed and the setting change is completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 48 (f), while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time the pressing operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected once, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are displayed. The set value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding and updating 1 to each, and when the pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed to setting 6. do.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed is completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which the character string "setting change completed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Error notification of hopper error / setting change mode (door open) / end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 49B is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is terminated.

In the same state, since the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) has ended while the hopper error (certain error) continues, the first notification (in this example, the payout number display). The hopper error notification by 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) are started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (d) are the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 45 (d) to 46 (a), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the state shown in 49 (b), since the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues, an error code (this example) was used using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). Then, by displaying "E4"), a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed, and a segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is performed. Is lit in red to give a hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred (in this example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 is turned on.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49 (c), since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is sent. While continuing, the second notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is terminated.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49 (d), since the reset button was operated (the second condition was satisfied) in order to eliminate the hopper error, the segment a (third) of the main board display 190 was satisfied. By lighting the notification means) in red, the reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved by the operation of the reset button. Therefore, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is terminated.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49 (e), since the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor, the opening notification (blinking in red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the speaker 272, While the output of the opening notification sound (sound "The door is open") by 277 and the door opening error notification (lighting of red in segment e) by the main board display 19 are terminated, the storage number display 125, The lighting of the payout number display 127 and the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 are continued, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lit in the effect mode to indicate that the normal game can be started. Notify.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is the number of payouts shown in the first notification means (for example, FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e)). Display 127), a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45D), and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. , And when the power is turned on while a certain operation by the setting key is performed, the setting value shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed, and the first notification means is: In at least a part of the period during which an error (for example, a hopper error) occurs (or all the periods during which an error occurs), the first notification (for example, the number of payouts displayed) It is a means capable of initiating the hopper error notification by the device 127), and the second notification means is at least a part of the period in which the certain error occurs (or the certain error occurs). It is a means capable of initiating a second notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) during all the periods), wherein the certain error satisfies the first condition. If the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or the door is reset) after (for example, the connection error of the hopper error is resolved), the error is resolved. When the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and then, when the first condition is satisfied, the first notification is continued. When the second notification is terminated, the power is cut off in a state where the certain error has occurred, and the power is turned on in the state where the certain operation is performed by the setting key, the set value is set. The game console is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification are started after shifting to a changeable state and changing the set value.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the setting change is prioritized over the notification of a certain error, the setting change can be surely finished and the setting change can be prevented from being forgotten. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to surely deal with the error after the setting change is completed.

Further, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that it is possible to notify that the error is not completely resolved and the second notification is made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store.

<Error notification / setting confirmation mode for hopper error>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when shifting to the setting confirmation mode will be described.

50 (a) to 51 (a) are diagrams showing an example of error notification of a hopper error in time series when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

<Error notification of hopper error / power on>
The state shown in FIG. 50A is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 50B is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to blink the front door. Notifying that the 102 is in the open state (opening notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door opening error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is notified. Then, the open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Error notification of hopper error / Start second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 50 (c) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and preparations such as initial setting have been completed.

Since the state shown in FIG. 50 (c) is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 45 (d), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the same state, a hopper error (something) that occurred before the power was turned on. Since the error) continues, a hopper error has occurred by displaying the error code (“E4” in this example) using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). A hopper error indicating that a hopper error has occurred by performing a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating the above and lighting the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 in red. Notify (second notification).

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred (in this example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 is turned on.

<Error notification of hopper error / door opening → operate the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 50 (d) is a state in which an operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed while the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power is turned on continues.

If the slot machine 100 causes an error (in this example, a hopper error) when a certain operation (operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key after the power is turned on, the slot machine 100 may have an error. The certain error is prioritized and the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). Is executed, and when a certain error is resolved, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 50 (d), a certain operation (operation from off to on) was performed by the setting key, but in this example, a certain operation by the setting key (operation from off to on) was performed. If a hopper error (certain error) occurs when the above is performed, the hopper error (certain error) is prioritized, and the state shifts to a state in which the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Without this, the hopper error notification (first notification) by the payout number display 127 and the hopper error notification (second notification) by the segment f of the main board display 190 are performed (continued).

According to this example, since the notification of a certain error is prioritized over the setting confirmation, the error can be dealt with promptly, and the setting is confirmed over time after the error is dealt with. This makes it possible to prevent situations such as forgetting to check the settings or forgetting the set values.

<Error notification of hopper error / resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 50 (e) is a state in which the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

Since the state shown in FIG. 50 (e) is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 45 (d), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the same state, the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (No. 1). Since one condition is satisfied), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is continued. To finish.

According to this example, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that it is possible to notify that the error is not completely resolved. Since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the amusement store.

In the same state, the setting key remains on, but since the hopper error has not been resolved, the state does not shift to the state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

<Error notification / reset button operation of hopper error → End the first notification → Move to the setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 50 (f) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation) in order to eliminate the hopper error (certain error).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was satisfied), the segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. As a result, the reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved by the operation of the reset button, so that the first notification (first notification) The hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is terminated.

Further, in the same state, when the setting key is on, the hopper error (certain error) is resolved, so that the state shifts to the state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but the front door 102 is opened. Since it is in the state of being set, the door body does not start outputting the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "setting is being confirmed") indicating that the set value can be confirmed. An opening notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the speaker is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the door opening is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating the door opening can be made conspicuous. The clerk of the amusement shop can surely know that the door is open.

Further, in the same state, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation") indicating that the setting value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode (this). In the example, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode) in which the character string "setting is being confirmed" is arranged in the upper left of the gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is not output, but the setting confirmation is displayed. Therefore, the clerk of the game store is confirming the setting by the display. Can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to indicate that the front door 102 is in the open state (notification). Open notification).

According to this example, the clerk of the amusement shop indicates that the door body is open during the setting confirmation by the light emitting means (the setting confirmation is performed or there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed). Etc. can be surely notified.

<Error notification of hopper error / elimination of hopper error → closing of front door>
The state shown in FIG. 51 (a) is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like closes the front door 102 after the hopper error is resolved.

Since the state shown in FIG. 51 (a) is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the same state, the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor. Therefore, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, the opening notification sound (voice saying "the door is open") by the speakers 272, 277, and the main board display. While the door opening error notification (lighting of segment e in red) by the device 19 is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are continuously lit and the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the normal screen, and the upper part is displayed. The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are turned on in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is the number of payouts shown in the first notification means (for example, FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e)). Display 127), a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45D), and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values. , And when a certain operation is performed by the setting key after the power is turned on, the setting value is changed to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the first notification means is present. In at least a part of the period during which an error (eg, hopper error) occurs (or all periods during which an error occurs), the first notification (eg, payout number indicator 127). The second notification means is a means capable of initiating the hopper error notification by the above, and the second notification means is at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or the period during which the certain error occurs). It is a means capable of initiating a second notification (eg, a hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) during all periods of the above certain error, wherein the first condition is satisfied (for example). For example, it is an error that is resolved when the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or the door is reset) after the connection error of the hopper error is resolved). When the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and when the first condition is subsequently satisfied, the first notification is continued while the first notification is continued. When the second notification is terminated, the power is cut off in a state where the certain error has occurred, the power is turned on, and then the certain operation is performed by the setting key, the first notification is performed. After the second notification is executed and the certain error is resolved (for example, after all the errors have been resolved in the case where multiple errors have occurred, or after the multiple errors have occurred). It is a game table characterized in that it is possible to shift (or always shift) to a state in which the set value can be confirmed (after some errors have been resolved).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the notification of a certain error is prioritized over the setting confirmation, so that the error can be dealt with promptly and it takes time after the error is dealt with. You can check the settings, and you can prevent situations where you forget to check the settings or forget the set values.

Further, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the first notification is continued, so that it is possible to notify that the error is not completely resolved and the second notification is made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in connection with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the clerk of the game store.

<Modification example of setting change mode / setting change mode>
Next, a normal setting change mode will be described prior to the description of the modification of the setting change mode.

52 (a) to 53 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the setting change operation in the normal setting change mode in chronological order.

<Modification example of setting change mode / Power on with setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 52 (a) is a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 52B is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power while the operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to blink the front door. Notifying that the 102 is in the open state (opening notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door opening error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is notified. Then, the open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Modification example of setting change mode / shift to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 52 (c) is a state in which the setting change mode is entered in a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred.

In the same state, since the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image).

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed". The opening notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the voice).

<Modification example of setting change mode / setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 52 (d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode (in this example). , In the display mode including the setting screen (operation check setting screen) where the operation check can be started while arranging the character string "setting is being changed" in the upper left of the green background image, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. indicate.

Also, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed". The voice) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described with reference to FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d), according to this example, in the door open state during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, since the notification sound during the setting change is output, the state of the door opening and the door closing can be linked with the presence / absence of the notification sound during the setting change, providing a game table with a characteristic notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, the notification sound indicates that the door is open while the setting is being changed (the setting may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have been performed). It is possible to surely notify the clerk or the like, and when the door is closed, the clerk of the amusement shop or the like can be surely notified that the setting change has not been completed by the notification sound.

Further, in the setting change mode of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which the operation check can be started. By operating the cross key 193 (operation means), a clerk of a game store or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, the accessory check, and the effect button check on the setting screen.

<Modification example of setting change mode / setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 52 (e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed"). The opening notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the voice), and the upper part is output. The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is the first. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image).

<Modification example of setting change mode / Operation of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 52 (f) is a state in which the set value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 53 (a) is a state in which the set value is fixed and the setting change is completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 52 (f), the set values 1 to 6 currently set are displayed each time the pressing operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127. The set value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding and updating 1 to each, and when the pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed to setting 6. do.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 53A, since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed is completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which the character string "setting change completed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Modification example of setting change mode / end of setting change mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), the setting change mode is terminated, and the front door is opened. This is a state in which 102 is changed from a closed state to an open state.

In the same state, since the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (“door”). Is open ”) and the door opening error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the main board display 19 is terminated, while the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are lit. While the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 is continued, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are turned on in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

<Modification example of setting change mode / setting confirmation mode>
Next, the normal setting confirmation mode will be described prior to the description of the modification of the setting change mode.

53 (c) to 54 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the setting confirmation operation in the normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Modification example of setting change mode / Operate the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 53 (c) is a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 53 (d) is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and operates a power switch arranged inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100, and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to blink the front door. Notifying that the 102 is in the open state (opening notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door opening error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is notified. Then, the open notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Modification example of setting change mode / shift to setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 53 (e) is a state in which the setting confirmation mode has been entered.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, a setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed") indicating that the set value can be confirmed is output. Is not started, and an opening notification sound (in this example, a voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the door opening is output. Therefore, the notification sound indicating the door opening can be made conspicuous. The clerk of the amusement shop can surely know that the door is open.

Further, in the same state, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting confirmation") indicating that the setting value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode (this). In the example, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode) in which the character string "setting is being confirmed" is arranged in the upper left of the gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the setting is being confirmed, the notification sound during the setting confirmation is not output, but the setting confirmation is displayed. Therefore, the clerk of the game store is confirming the setting by the display. Can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 blink in red to indicate that the front door 102 is in the open state (notification). Open notification).

According to this example, the clerk of the amusement shop indicates that the door body is open during the setting confirmation by the light emitting means (the setting confirmation is performed or there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed). Etc. can be surely notified.

<Modification example of setting change mode / end of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 54 (a) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting confirmation mode is terminated. The state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state.

In the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), since the setting confirmation mode is completed, the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are turned on and the normal screen is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 is displayed. Since is in the open state, the opening notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button are output. 192 blinks in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

In the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), since the closure of the front door 102 was detected by the open / close sensor, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the effect button 192, and the speaker 272, 277 were used. While the output of the opening notification sound (voice saying "door is open") and the door opening error notification by the main board display 19 (lighting of red in segment e) are completed, the number of stored sheets display 125 and the number of payouts are displayed. While the display 127 is lit and the normal screen is continuously displayed by the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lit in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started. conduct.

<Modification example of setting change mode / Setting change mode by operating the setting key after turning on the power>
Next, the setting change mode by operating the setting key after the power is turned on will be described.

54 (c) to 55 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the setting change mode by operating the setting key after the power is turned on in chronological order.

<Setting change mode by operating the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 54 (a) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notification by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notification by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), Neither notification is performed by the sound output means (speakers 277,278).

The state shown in FIG. 54 (b) is a state in which a clerk of a game store or the like opens the front door 102 and the power is turned on, and the state shown in FIG. 54 (c) is a state before notification of (a certain error). , The operation to turn the setting key from off to on has been performed.

The slot machine 100 is turned off in a state where a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and when the power is turned on, the certain error is not resolved (first case). A certain operation (book) after the power is turned on and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is started. In the example, when the setting key is turned from off to on), the setting value is configured to be in a changeable state (setting change mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), since power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 blink in red. By doing so, a notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification) is performed, and by lighting the segment e of the main board display 190 in red, the front door 102 is in the open state. The door opening error notification shown is performed, and the opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "the door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (c), since the operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed before the error notification of the hopper error is started, the mode shifts to the setting change mode.

According to this example, since the set value can be changed even after the power is turned on, the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

The following states shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (f) are almost the same as the states described with reference to FIGS. 48 (e) to 49 (d), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. The state shown in FIG. 55A is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "setting is being changed"). The opening notification sound (in this example, the voice saying "the door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the voice), and the upper part is output. The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

Further, in the same state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "setting changing") is the first. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string "setting is being changed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image).

The state shown in FIG. 55 (b) is a state in which the set value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 55 (c) is a state in which the set value is confirmed and the setting change is completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the set values 1 to 6 currently set are displayed each time the pressing operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127. The set value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding and updating 1 to each, and when the pressing operation by the operation means (start lever 135 in this example) is accepted, the set value is confirmed to setting 6. do.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (c), since the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value is confirmed and the setting change is completed is completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which the character string "setting change completed" is arranged in the center of the yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 55 (d) is a state in which a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (the setting key is pulled out after the operation of turning the setting key from on to off is performed), and the setting change mode is terminated.

In the same state, since the setting change mode (the state in which the setting value can be changed) has ended while the hopper error (certain error) continues, the first notification (in this example, the payout number display). The hopper error notification by 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) are started.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred (in this example, the display of the character string "This is a hopper error. Please call a staff member") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Since the preparations such as the initial setting are completed, the stored number display 125 is turned on.

According to this example, since the error state is entered after the setting change operation is completed, the error is not forgotten by the setting change work, and the error is surely resolved before the game is started. be able to.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (e), since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued. On the other hand, the second notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is terminated.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (f), the reset button is operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition is satisfied), and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved, so that the first notification is given. (Notification of hopper error by payout number display 127) is terminated. In the same state, since the opening / closing sensor detected the closure of the front door 102, the opening notification (blinking red) by the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192, and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 (blinking red). While the output of "the door is open") and the door opening error notification (lighting of red in segment e) by the main board display 19 are finished, the stored number display 125 and the payout number display 127 While the lighting and the display of the normal screen by the liquid crystal display device 157 are continued, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are lit in the effect mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, and a storage number display 125). , Speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, effect button 192, stop button 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and one of multiple setting values can be set. The game console is provided with various setting means, and the notification means is by a first notification (for example, a payout number display 127) indicating that at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has occurred. It is a means that can start hopper error notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190), and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error occurs. Is not resolved (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and when the power is turned on while a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key. Is a state in which the set value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the set value can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation). Mode), and in the first case, the set value can be changed when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. It is a game console characterized by being migrated (or can be migrated).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the set value can be changed even after the power is turned on, so that the convenience of the clerk of the game store can be improved.

Further, in the first case, the set value can be changed when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started. It may be a state in which the set value does not shift to a confirmable state but becomes an error state, and when the error state is resolved, the set value shifts to a confirmable state.

With such a configuration, since the game cannot be started unless the error is resolved, the error can be reliably resolved and the set value can be confirmed before the game is started.

Further, in the first case, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started, the set value is changed to a state in which the set value can be changed. , It may be the one that shifts to the error state after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely eliminate the error before starting the game without forgetting to deal with the error by the work of changing the setting.

Further, in the first case, when the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the set value shifts to a changeable state, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be a transition.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely eliminate the error before starting the game without forgetting to deal with the error by the work of changing the setting.

Further, after the power is turned on in a state where an error different from the certain error (for example, an error resolved by changing the setting (medal insertion abnormality 2 or the like)) has occurred, the power is turned on. If the certain operation is performed before the first notification is started, the set value is changed to a state in which the set value can be changed, and after the setting change operation is completed (or a state in which the set value can be changed). It may shift to a state where the game can be played without shifting to an error state (after the end of).

With such a configuration, if a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing the setting occurs, the game can be advanced without shifting to the error state, and the operating rate of the game console can be increased. can.

Further, when the power is turned on, the power is cut off in a state where an error different from the certain error (for example, an error resolved by changing the setting (medal insertion abnormality 2 etc.)) occurs, and the certain operation is performed. When the power is turned on in the state where the setting value is changed, the setting value shifts to the changeable state and the setting change operation is completed (or after the setting value changeable state is completed). It may be one that shifts to a state in which the game can be played without shifting to an error state.

With such a configuration, if a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing the setting occurs, the game can be advanced without shifting to the error state, and the operating rate of the game console can be increased. can.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned error cannot be resolved by setting change and setting confirmation (for example, hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal insertion jam), medal payout error 1 (medal payout jam), medal payout error). 3 (illegal payout), overflow abnormality) may be used. Further, the other error may be an error that can be resolved by changing the setting (for example, RAM failure (RWM abnormality), winning abnormality (winning symbol abnormality), backup abnormality). Further, the other error may be an error that cannot be resolved by the setting confirmation.

Here, the setting change includes an error when the power is turned on while a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed by the setting key, and after the power is turned on. Both of the cases where the above-mentioned operation is performed before the first notification indicating that the occurrence has occurred are included, and the error resolved by the setting change shifts to the state where the setting value can be changed. After that, the setting value is changed (or the setting value is not changed), and when the state where the setting value can be changed ends (when a certain operation is canceled), the error is resolved. be.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (1)

A setting means that can set one of multiple setting values, and
A door that can be opened and closed,
Notification means and
It is a game table equipped with
When the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed by the setting key, the setting value can be changed.
The notification means is a means including a sound output means, and is a means.
The sound output means is in a state where the set value can be changed and the set value can be changed when the door body is in the open state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). It is a means that does not execute the output of the notification sound indicating
The sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable when the set value is changeable and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state. Is a way to get started
The sound output means is a means for outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as the first sound in the first case.
The sound output means indicates that the door body is in the open state when the state in which the set value can be changed ends and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after shifting to the normal gaming state. It is a means that may output the indicated notification sound as a second sound.
The first sound and the second sound are different sounds.
A game table featuring that.

Images